Avyakt murli for Monday 9 January 1995

Warning : Sentence alignment between two languages is based on the number of characters. It is therefore not perfectly reliable.

You can correct the sentence alignment yourself on part or all of the murli.
0>>>>109-01-95 ओम शान्ति अव्यक्त बापदादामधुबन09-01-95 ōm śhānti avyakt bāpadādāmadhuban09-01-95 ōm śhānti avyakt[adj.] x09-01-95 Om peace avyakt x

0> > 09-01-95 Om Shanti Avyakt Bapdada Madhuban

2निश्चयबुद्धि की निशानियाँ - निश्चित विजयी और सदा निश्चिन्त स्थिति का अनुभवniśhchaybuddhi kī|key niśhāniyā̃ - niśhchit vijayī aur sadā niśhchinta sthiti kā anubhavniśhchaybuddhi[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] karnā[past-part.f.]|kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|key niśhānī[n.f.ī=>iyā̃;pl.d.] - niśhchit[adj.] vijayī[adj.] aur sadā niśhchint[x] sthiti[n.f.;sg.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] anubhav[n.m.;sg.,d.]intellect with faith (do[past-part.f.]|of|key) sign - fixed victorious and constantly without worry stage of experience

1THE SIGN OF HAVING FAITH IN THE INTELLECT IS TO HAVE GUARANTEED VICTORY AND TO EXPERIENCE A CONSTANTLY CAREFREE STAGE.

3आज सर्व बच्चों के रक्षक और शिक्षक बापदादा अपने सभी ब्राह्मण बच्चों के फाउण्डेशन को देख रहे थे . āj sarv bachchō̃ kē|K rakṣhak aur śhikṣhak bāpdādā apnē sabhī brāhmaṇ bachchō̃ kē|K foundation kō dēkh rahē thē . āj sarv[adj.] bachchā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K rakṣhak[n.m.;sg.,d.] aur śhikṣhak[x] bāpdādā apnā[pn.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] sab[adv.hī] brāhmaṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.] bachchā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K foundation kō[postp.] dēkhnā[root] rahnā[past-perf.pl.m.] . today all child (of|K) protector and teacher BapDada one’s own all Brahmin child (of|K) foundation to see[root] remain[past-perf.pl.m.] .

2Today, BapDada, the Protector and Teacher of all the children, is seeing the foundation of all His Brahmin children.

4ये तो सभी जानते हो कि वर्तमान श्रेष्ठ जीवन का फाउण्डेशन निश्चय है . yē tō sabhī jāntē hō ki vartamān śhrēṣhṭh jīvan kā foundation niśhchay hai . yah[pn.pl.d.] tō sab[adv.hī] jānnā[pres.pl.m.2] ki[conj.] vartamān[adj.] śhrēṣhṭha[adj.] jīvan[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] foundation niśhchay[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] . this then all know[pres.pl.m.2] that present elevated life of foundation faith be[pres.sg.23] .

3All of you know that the foundation of the present elevated life is faith.

5जितना निश्चय रूपी फाउण्डेशन पक्का है उतना ही आदि से अब तक सहज योगी , निर्मल स्वभाव , शुभ भावना की वृत्ति और आत्मिक दृष्टि सदा नेचुरल रूप में अनुभव होती है . jitnā niśhchay rūpī foundation pakkā hai utnā hī ādi sē ab tak sahaj yōgī , nirmal svabhāv , śhubh bhāvnā kī|key vr̥itti aur ātmik dr̥iṣhṭi sadā natural rūp mē̃ anubhav hōtī hai . jitnā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] niśhchay[n.m.;sg.,d.] rūpī[adj.] foundation pakkā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] utnā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hī[p.] ādi[adj.] sē[postp.] ab[adv.] tak sahaj[adj.] yōgī[x] , nirmal[adj.] svabhāv[n.m.;sg.,d.] , śhubh bhāvnā[x] karnā[past-part.f.]|kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|key vr̥itti[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] aur ātmik[adj.] dr̥iṣhṭi[n.f.;sg.] sadā natural rūp[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] anubhav[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.f.23] . the more faith in the form of foundation firm be[pres.sg.23] x only etc. from now until easy yogi , x nature , pure feeling (do[past-part.f.]|of|key) attitude and soul-conscious drishti constantly natural Rup in experience be[pres.sg.f.23] .

4From the beginning until now, to the extent that your foundation of faith is firm, to that extent you constantly experience in a natural form being an easy yogi, having a gentle and pure nature, an attitude of good wishes and soul­conscious vision.

6हर समय चलन और चेहरे से उनकी झलक अनुभव होती है क्योंकि ब्राह्मण जीवन में सिर्फ जानना नहीं है कि ‘ मैं ये हूँ और बाप ये है ’ , लेकिन जानने का अर्थ है जो जानते हैं वो मानना और चलना . har|her samay chalan aur chēhrē sē unkī jhalak anubhav hōtī hai kyōṅki brāhmaṇ jīvan mē̃ sirph jānnā nahī̃ hai ki ‘ maĩ yē hū̃ aur bāp yē hai ’ , lēkin jānnē kā arth|earth hai jō jāntē haĩ vō mānnā aur chalnā . har|harnā[root]|her samay[n.m.;sg.,d.] chalan[n.m.;sg.,d.] aur chēhrā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] sē[postp.] vah[pn.pl.kī] jhalaknā[root]|jhalak[n.f.;sg.] anubhav[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.f.23] kyōṅki brāhmaṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.] jīvan[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] sirph[adj.] jānnā[inf.m.sg.d.] nahī̃[neg] hōnā[pres.sg.23] ki[conj.] ‘ maĩ[pn.sg.d.] yah[pn.pl.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.1] aur bāp[n.m.;sg.,d.] yah[pn.pl.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] ’ , lēkin jānnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] arth[n.m.;sg.,d.]|earth hōnā[pres.sg.23] jō[pn.;d.] jānnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] vah[pn.;d.] mānnā[inf.m.sg.d.] aur chalnā[inf.m.sg.d.] . (x|x[root]) time behaviour and face from that[.kī] (sparkle[root]|x) experience be[pres.sg.f.23] because Brahmin life in only know[inf.m.sg.d.] not be[pres.sg.23] that ‘ I this be[pres.sg.1] and father this be[pres.sg.23] ’ , but know[inf.m.pl.,o.] of (meaning|earth) be[pres.sg.23] that know[pres.pl.m.12hon3] that x[inf.m.sg.d.] and continue[inf.m.sg.d.] .

5At every moment, this is experienced from the sparkle on your face and from your activity. 6Because, in Brahmin life, it's not just a question of knowing: "I am this, the Father is this", but to know means that you accept whatever you know and move along according to that.

7बापदादा देख रहे थे कि जो भी बच्चे अपने को ब्राह्मण कहलाते हैं वो सभी ये फलक से कहते हैं कि हम निश्चयबुद्धि हैं . bāpdādā dēkh rahē thē ki jō bhī bachchē apnē kō brāhmaṇ kahlātē haĩ vō sabhī yē phalak sē kahtē haĩ ki ham niśhchaybuddhi haĩ . bāpdādā dēkhnā[root] rahnā[past-perf.pl.m.] ki[conj.] jō[pn.;d.] bhī[p.] bachchā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] apnā[pn.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] kō[postp.] brāhmaṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.] kahlānā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] vah[pn.;d.] sab[adv.hī] yah[pn.pl.d.] phalak[n.m.;sg.,d.] sē[postp.] kahnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] ki[conj.] ham[pn.pl.] niśhchaybuddhi[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] . BapDada see[root] remain[past-perf.pl.m.] that that too child one’s own to Brahmin call[pres.pl.m.12hon3] that all this sparkle of intoxication from say[pres.pl.m.12hon3] that we intellect with faith be[pres.pl.12hon3] .

7This is why your face and activity give the experience of this. 8BapDada was seeing that all those children who call themselves Brahmins say with intoxication that they have faith in the intellect.

8तो बापदादा सभी निश्चयबुद्धि बच्चों से पूछते हैं , जब आप सभी कहते हो कि हम निश्चयबुद्धि विजयी हैं तो कभी विजय , कभी हार क्यों होती है  ? tō bāpdādā sabhī niśhchaybuddhi bachchō̃ sē pūchhtē haĩ , jab āp sabhī kahtē hō ki ham niśhchaybuddhi vijayī haĩ tō kabhī vijay , kabhī hār kyō̃ hōtī hai  ? tō bāpdādā sab[adv.hī] niśhchaybuddhi[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] bachchā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] sē[postp.] pūchhnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] , jab āp[pn.pl.] sab[adv.hī] kahnā[pres.pl.m.2] ki[conj.] ham[pn.pl.] niśhchaybuddhi[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] vijayī[adj.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] tō kabhī[adv.] vijay[n.m.;sg.,d.] , kabhī[adv.] hār[n.m.;sg.,d.]|hār[n.m.;sg.,d.]|hārnā[root] kyō̃ hōnā[pres.sg.f.23]  ? then BapDada all intellect with faith child from ask[pres.pl.m.12hon3] , when you all say[pres.pl.m.2] that we intellect with faith victorious be[pres.pl.12hon3] then ever victory , ever (x|x[root]) why be[pres.sg.f.23]  ?

9Are all of you those who have faith in the intellect or are some of you not this? 10BapDada is asking all those children who have faith in the intellect: All of you speak of being those who are victorious through having faith in the intellect.

9जब कभी ­ कभी थोड़ी हलचल होती है तो क्या उस समय निश्चय खत्म हो जाता है  ? jab kabhī ­ kabhī thōṛī halchal hōtī hai tō kyā us samay niśhchay khatm hō jātā hai  ? jab kabhī[adv.] ­ kabhī[adv.] thōṛā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] halchal[x] hōnā[pres.sg.f.23] tō kyā vah[pn.sg.o.] samay[n.m.;sg.,d.] niśhchay[n.m.;sg.,d.] ḵẖatm[adj.] hōnā[pres.sg.m.23.root+jānā]  ? when ever ­ ever short upheaval be[pres.sg.f.23] then what that time faith finished be[pres.sg.m.23.root+jānā]  ?

11Are you firm in this? 12So then, why is there sometimes victory and sometimes defeat? 13Do you not have faith at that time?

10जब निश्चयबुद्धि सदा हो तो विजयी सदा हो कि बीच ­ बीच में घुटका और झुटका होता है  ? jab niśhchaybuddhi sadā hō tō vijayī sadā hō ki bīch ­ bīch mē̃ ghuṭkā aur jhuṭkā hōtā hai  ? jab niśhchaybuddhi[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] sadā hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] tō vijayī[adj.] sadā hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] ki[conj.] bīch ­ bīch mē̃[postp.] ghuṭkā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] aur jhuṭkā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.m.23]  ? when intellect with faith constantly (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) then victorious constantly (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) that centre ­ centre in x and nodding off be[pres.sg.m.23]  ?

14Because, the sign of having faith in the intellect is to be victorious. 15So, are you constantly victorious?

11निश्चय का फाउण्डेशन चारों ओर से मजबूत है या चारों ओर के बजाय कभी एक ओर कभी दो ओर ढीले हो जाते हैं  ? niśhchay kā foundation chārō̃ ōr sē majbūt hai yā chārō̃ ōr kē|K bajāy kabhī ēk ōr kabhī dō ōr ḍhīlē hō jātē haĩ  ? niśhchay[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] foundation chārō̃ ōr[x] sē[postp.] majbūt[adj.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] yā chārō̃ ōr[x] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K bajāē kabhī[adv.] ēk[adj.] ōr kabhī[adv.] dō[adj.]|dēnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] ōr ḍhīlā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] hōnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3.root+jānā]  ? faith of foundation everywhere from x be[pres.sg.23] or everywhere (of|K) x ever one direction ever (two|give[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2]) direction x be[pres.pl.m.12hon3.root+jānā]  ?

16Or is it that you are sometimes victorious and sometimes there is fluctuation? 17Is there a little fluctuation? 18You are not saying yes now. 19What happens at that time?

12कोई भी चीज़ को मजबूत किया जाता है तो चारों ओर से टाइट किया जाता है ना . kōī bhī chīz kō majbūt kiyā jātā hai tō chārō̃ ōr sē tight kiyā jātā hai nā . kōī bhī[x] chīz[n.f.;sg.] kō[postp.] majbūt[adj.] karnā[pres.sg.m.23.past-part+jānā]|karnā[pres.sg.m.23.passive] tō chārō̃ ōr[x] sē[postp.] tight karnā[pres.sg.m.23.past-part+jānā]|karnā[pres.sg.m.23.passive] nā . anyone thing to x (do[pres.sg.m.23.past-part+jānā]|do[pres.sg.m.23.passive]) then everywhere from tight (do[pres.sg.m.23.past-part+jānā]|do[pres.sg.m.23.passive]) ∅ .

20Does your faith finish at that time? 21Are you those who constantly have faith in the intellect?

13अगर एक साइड भी थोड़ा ­ सा हलचल वाला हो तो हिलेगा ना  ! agar ēk side bhī thōṛā ­ sā halchal vālā hō tō hilēgā nā  ! agar ēk[adj.] side bhī[p.] thōṛā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] ­ sā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] halchal[x] vālā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] tō hilnā[fut.m.sg.23] nā  ! if one side too short ­ x upheaval those who (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) then x[fut.m.sg.23] ∅  !

22Are you constantly victorious? 23Or are you choking or dosing off every now and then?

14तो चारों प्रकार का निश्चय अर्थात् बाप में , आप में , ड्रामा में और ब्राह्मण परिवार में निश्चय . tō chārō̃ prakār kā niśhchay arthāt bāp mē̃ , āp mē̃ , drama mē̃ aur brāhmaṇ parivār mē̃ niśhchay . tō chārō̃ prakār[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] niśhchay[n.m.;sg.,d.] arthāt bāp[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] , āp[pn.pl.] mē̃[postp.] , drama mē̃[postp.] aur brāhmaṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.] parivār[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] niśhchay[n.m.;sg.,d.] . then x form of faith that is father in , you in , drama in and Brahmin family in faith .

24The foundation of faith has to be strong on all four sides. 25Or, it it that sometimes, instead of all four sides being strong, one or two sides become weak?

15ये चार ही तरफ के निश्चय को जानना नहीं लेकिन मानकर चलना . yē chār hī taraph kē|K niśhchay kō jānnā nahī̃ lēkin mānkar chalnā . yah[pn.pl.d.] chār[adj.] hī[p.] taraph[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K niśhchay[n.m.;sg.,d.] kō[postp.] jānnā[inf.m.sg.d.] nahī̃[neg] lēkin mānnā[abs.] chalnā[inf.m.sg.d.] . this four only direction (of|K) faith to know[inf.m.sg.d.] not but x[abs.] continue[inf.m.sg.d.] .

26When anything is to be made strong, it is tightened from all four sides.

16अगर जानते हैं लेकिन चलते नहीं हैं तो विजय डगमग होती है . agar jāntē haĩ lēkin chaltē nahī̃ haĩ tō vijay ḍagmag hōtī hai . agar jānnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] lēkin chalnā[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] nahī̃[neg] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] tō vijay[n.m.;sg.,d.] ḍagmag[adj.] hōnā[pres.sg.f.23] . if know[pres.pl.m.12hon3] but continue[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] not be[pres.pl.12hon3] then victory rocking be[pres.sg.f.23] .

27If even one side has even a little fluctuation, would it remain strong? 28It would shake, would it not?

17जिस समय विजय हलचल में आती है , तो चेक करना कि चारों तरफ से कौन ­ सा तरफ हलचल में है  ? jis samay vijay halchal mē̃ ātī hai , tō check karnā ki chārō̃ taraph sē kaun ­ sā taraph halchal mē̃ hai  ? jis samay[x] vijay[n.m.;sg.,d.] halchal[x] mē̃[postp.] ānā[pres.sg.f.23] , tō check karnā[inf.m.sg.d.] ki[conj.] chārō̃ taraph[x] sē[postp.] kaun[pn.;d.] ­ sā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] taraph[n.m.;sg.,d.] halchal[x] mē̃[postp.] hōnā[pres.sg.23]  ? x victory upheaval in come[pres.sg.f.23] , then check do[inf.m.sg.d.] that everywhere from who ­ x direction upheaval in be[pres.sg.23]  ?

29So, you know about all four types of faith. 30Faith in the Father, faith in the self, faith in the drama and faith in the Brahmin family.

18बापदादा देखते हैं कि कई बच्चों को बाप में पूरा निश्चय है , इसमें पास हैं लेकिन अपने आपमें जो निश्चय चाहिए उसमें अन्तर पड़ जाता है . bāpdādā dēkhtē haĩ ki kaī bachchō̃ kō bāp mē̃ pūrā niśhchay hai , ismē̃ pās|pass haĩ lēkin apnē āpmē̃ jō niśhchay chāhiē usmē̃ antar paṛ jātā hai . bāpdādā dēkhnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] ki[conj.] kaī bachchā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] kō[postp.] bāp[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] pūrā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] niśhchay[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] , yah[pn.sg.mē̃] pās|pass hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] lēkin apnā[pn.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] āp[pn.pl.mē̃] jō[pn.;d.] niśhchay[n.m.;sg.,d.] chāhiē|chāhnā[imp.pl.2hon] vah[pn.sg.mē̃] antar[n.m.;sg.,d.] paṛnā[pres.sg.m.23.root+jānā] . BapDada see[pres.pl.m.12hon3] that some child to father in full faith be[pres.sg.23] , this[.mē̃] (x|pass) be[pres.pl.12hon3] but one’s own you[.mē̃] that faith (should|x[imp.pl.2hon]) that[.mē̃] difference fall[pres.sg.m.23.root+jānā] .

31You must not just have faith in knowing all four of them, but in accepting and moving along with them. 32If even one side is known but you are not moving along according to it, then there would be fluctuation in your victory.

19जानते भी हैं , कहते भी हैं कि मैं ये हूँ , मैं ये हूँ , लेकिन जो जानते हैं , मानते हैं वो स्वरूप में , चलन में , कर्म में हो-इसमें ही अन्तर पड़ जाता है . jāntē bhī haĩ , kahtē bhī haĩ ki maĩ yē hū̃ , maĩ yē hū̃ , lēkin jō jāntē haĩ , māntē haĩ vō svarūp mē̃ , chalan mē̃ , karma mē̃ hō-isamē̃ hī antar paṛ jātā hai . jānnā[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] bhī[p.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] , kahnā[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] bhī[p.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] ki[conj.] maĩ[pn.sg.d.] yah[pn.pl.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.1] , maĩ[pn.sg.d.] yah[pn.pl.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.1] , lēkin jō[pn.;d.] jānnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] , mānnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] vah[pn.;d.] svarūp[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] , chalan[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] , karm[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] x hī[p.] antar[n.m.;sg.,d.] paṛnā[pres.sg.m.23.root+jānā] . know[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] too be[pres.pl.12hon3] , say[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] too be[pres.pl.12hon3] that I this be[pres.sg.1] , I this be[pres.sg.1] , but that know[pres.pl.m.12hon3] , x[pres.pl.m.12hon3] that form in , behaviour in , deed in x only difference fall[pres.sg.m.23.root+jānā] .

33At the time when there is fluctuation in your victory, check which of the four sides is fluctuating. 34Many times, BapDada sees that the children have passed in having faith in the Father, but sometimes, although they know about themselves, they even say, "I am this and I am this".

20एक तरफ सोचते हैं कि मैं मास्टर सर्वशक्तिमान् हूँ , विश्व कल्याणकारी हूँ , दूसरे तरफ छोटी ­ सी परिस्थिति पर विजय नहीं प्राप्त कर सकते . ēk taraph sōchtē haĩ ki maĩ master sarvśhaktimān hū̃ , viśhva kalyāṇkārī hū̃ , dūsrē taraph chhōṭī ­ see|sī|C paristhiti par vijay nahī̃ prāpt kar saktē . ēk taraph[x] sōchnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] ki[conj.] maĩ[pn.sg.d.] master sarvśhaktimān[x] hōnā[pres.sg.1] , viśhva[n.m.;sg.,d.] kalyāṇkārī[adj.] hōnā[pres.sg.1] , dūsrē taraph[x] chhōṭā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] ­ see|sā[adj.ā=>ī;f.]|C paristhiti[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] par[postp.]|par[adj.] vijay[n.m.;sg.,d.] nahī̃[neg] prāpt karnā[root] saknā[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] . x think[pres.pl.m.12hon3] that I Master, the Almighty Authority be[pres.sg.1] , world beneficial be[pres.sg.1] , x small ­ (see|x) circumstances (at|other) victory not reach can[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] . 21हैं तो मास्टर सर्वशक्तिमान् लेकिन ये परिस्थिति बहुत बड़ी है , ये बात ही ऐसी है  ! haĩ tō master sarvśhaktimān lēkin yē paristhiti bahut baṛī hai , yē bāt hī aisī hai  ! hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] tō master sarvśhaktimān[x] lēkin yah[pn.pl.d.] paristhiti[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] bahut baṛā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] , yah[pn.pl.d.] bāt[n.f.;sg.] hī[p.] aisā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] hōnā[pres.sg.23]  ! be[pres.pl.12hon3] then Master, the Almighty Authority but this circumstances very very be[pres.sg.23] , this matter only such be[pres.sg.23]  !

35However, there is a difference in accepting and moving along according to it, in being the embodiment of all that you know and accept, and in it being in your activity and actions. 36On the one hand, you think that you are a master almighty authority, that you are a world benefactor, and on the other hand, you are not able to attain victory over a small situation.

22तो क्या ये निश्चय है कि सिर्फ जानना है लेकिन मानकर चलना नहीं  ? tō kyā yē niśhchay hai ki sirph jānnā hai lēkin mānkar chalnā nahī̃  ? tō kyā yah[pn.pl.d.] niśhchay[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] ki[conj.] sirph[adj.] jānnā[pres.sg.23.oblig1] lēkin mānnā[abs.] chalnā[inf.m.sg.d.] nahī̃[neg]  ? then what this faith be[pres.sg.23] that only know[pres.sg.23.oblig1] but x[abs.] continue[inf.m.sg.d.] not  ?

37You are the master almighty authorities, but then you say that the situation is very big, that the circumstance is like this. 38So, is this faith?

23कहते वा सोचते हैं कि मैं विश्व कल्याणकारी हूँ लेकिन विश्व को तो छोड़ो , स्व कल्याण में भीकमज़ोर होते हैं . kahtē vā sōchtē haĩ ki maĩ viśhva kalyāṇkārī hū̃ lēkin viśhva kō tō chhōṛō , sva kalyāṇ mē̃ bhīkamazōr hōtē haĩ . kahnā[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] vā sōchnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] ki[conj.] maĩ[pn.sg.d.] viśhva[n.m.;sg.,d.] kalyāṇkārī[adj.] hōnā[pres.sg.1] lēkin viśhva[n.m.;sg.,d.] kō[postp.] tō chhōṛnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] , sva kalyāṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] x hōnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] . say[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] or think[pres.pl.m.12hon3] that I world beneficial be[pres.sg.1] but world to then renounce[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] , x benefit in x be[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

39Or, is it just knowing and not accepting and moving along according to it? 40You say and think that you are the world benefactors, but, let alone the world, you are weak even in bringing benefit to the self.

24अगर उस समय उन्हें कहो कि क्या स्वयं को परिवर्तन कर स्व कल्याणकारी नहीं बन सकते  ? agar us samay unhē̃ kahō ki kyā svayã kō parivartan kar sva kalyāṇkārī nahī̃ ban saktē  ? agar vah[pn.sg.o.] samay[n.m.;sg.,d.] vah[pn.pl.kō] kahnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] ki[conj.] kyā svayã kō[postp.] parivartan[n.m.;sg.,d.] karnā[root] sva kalyāṇkārī[adj.] nahī̃[neg] ban[n.m.;sg.,d.]|bannā[root] saknā[pres-part.m.pl.,o.]  ? if that time that[.kō] say[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] that what x to transformation do[root] x beneficial not (x|become[root]) can[pres-part.m.pl.,o.]  ?

41If, at that time, you are told that, by not bringing about transformation in the self, you are not a self­transformer, then what response do you give?

25तो जवाब देते हैं कि हैं तो विश्व कल्याणकारी लेकिन स्व कल्याण बहुत मुश्किल है  ! tō javāb dētē haĩ ki haĩ tō viśhva kalyāṇkārī lēkin sva kalyāṇ bahut muśhkil hai  ! tō javāb[n.m.;sg.,d.] dēnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] ki[conj.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] tō viśhva[n.m.;sg.,d.] kalyāṇkārī[adj.] lēkin sva kalyāṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.] bahut muśhkil[adj.] hōnā[pres.sg.23]  ! then x give[pres.pl.m.12hon3] that be[pres.pl.12hon3] then world beneficial but x benefit very difficult be[pres.sg.23]  !

42You are world benefactors but you find self­transformation very difficult. 43"It is difficult to change this". 44What would you call this?

26ये बात बदलना मुश्किल है  ! yē bāt badalnā muśhkil hai  ! yah[pn.pl.d.] bāt[n.f.;sg.] badalnā[inf.m.sg.d.] muśhkil[adj.] hōnā[pres.sg.23]  ! this matter change[inf.m.sg.d.] difficult be[pres.sg.23]  ! 27तो विश्व कल्याणकारी कहेंगे या कमज़ोर  ? tō viśhva kalyāṇkārī kahē̃gē yā kamzōr  ? tō viśhva[n.m.;sg.,d.] kalyāṇkārī[adj.] kahnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] yā kamjōr[adj.]  ? then world beneficial say[fut.m.pl.12hon3] or weak  ?

45One who brings benefit to the world (vishwa kalyankari) or one who weakens the world (vishwa kamzorkari)?

28तो स्व में भी परिस्थिति प्रमाण , समय प्रमाण , सम्बन्ध ­ सम्पर्क प्रमाण निश्चय स्वरूप में आये , ऐसे निश्चय बुद्धि की विजय हुई ही पड़ी है . tō sva mē̃ bhī paristhiti pramāṇ , samay pramāṇ , sambandh ­ samparka pramāṇ niśhchay svarūp mē̃ āyē , aisē niśhchay buddhi kī|key vijay huī hī paṛī hai . tō sva mē̃[postp.] bhī[p.] paristhiti[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] pramāṇ|pramāṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.] , samay[n.m.;sg.,d.] pramāṇ|pramāṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.] , sambandh[n.m.;sg.,d.] ­ sampark[n.m.;sg.,d.] pramāṇ|pramāṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.] niśhchay[n.m.;sg.,d.] svarūp[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] ānā[opt.sg.23]|ānā[past-part.m.pl.,o.] , aisā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] niśhchay[n.m.;sg.,d.] buddhi[n.f.;sg.] karnā[past-part.f.]|kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|key vijay[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[past-part.f.] hī[p.] paṛnā[pres-perf.sg.f.23] . then x in too circumstances (under) , time (under) , relationship ­ x (under) faith form in (come[opt.sg.23]|come[past-part.m.pl.,o.]) , such faith intellect (do[past-part.f.]|of|key) victory be[past-part.f.] only fall[pres-perf.sg.f.23] .

46So, in terms of the self also, according to the circumstances, according to the time, according to your connections and relations, you should be the embodiment of that faith. 47For souls who have such faith in the intellect, victory is guaranteed. 48You have the faith that you are an elevated soul. 49This is firm in everyone, is it not?

29जैसे सभी को ये पक्का निश्चय है कि मैं श्रेष्ठ आत्मा हूँ , इसके लिए कोई दुनिया के वैज्ञानिक भी आपको हिलाने की कोशिश करें कि आत्मा नहीं शरीर हो , तो मानेंगे नहीं और ही उसको मनायेंगे . jaisē sabhī kō yē pakkā niśhchay hai ki maĩ śhrēṣhṭh ātmā hū̃ , iskē liē kōī duniyā kē|K vaigyānik bhī āpkō hilānē kī|key kōśhiśh karē̃ ki ātmā nahī̃ śharīr hō , tō mānē̃gē nahī̃ aur hī uskō manāyēṅgē . jaisā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] sab[adv.hī] kō[postp.] yah[pn.pl.d.] pakkā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] niśhchay[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] ki[conj.] maĩ[pn.sg.d.] śhrēṣhṭha[adj.] ātmā[n.f.;sg.] hōnā[pres.sg.1] , yah[pn.sg.kē] lēnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|liē kōī[pn.;d.] duniyā[n.f.;sg.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K vaigyānik[n.m.;sg.,d.] bhī[p.] āp[pn.pl.kō] hilānā[inf.m.pl.,o.] karnā[past-part.f.]|kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|key kōśhiśh[n.f.;sg.] karnā[opt.pl.12hon3] ki[conj.] ātmā[n.f.;sg.] nahī̃[neg] śharīr[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] , tō mānnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] nahī̃[neg] aur hī[p.] vah[pn.sg.kō] manānā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] . like all to this firm faith be[pres.sg.23] that I elevated soul be[pres.sg.1] , this[.kē] (take[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|for) some world (of|K) x too you[.kō] make fluctuate[inf.m.pl.,o.] (do[past-part.f.]|of|key) try do[opt.pl.12hon3] that soul not body (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) , then x[fut.m.pl.12hon3] not and only that[.kō] celebrate[fut.m.pl.12hon3] .

50Or, are you weak in even this lesson? 51Is it firm? 52Achcha. 53If any scientist of the world tries to make you fluctuate in the fact that you are not a soul but a body, would you believe him?

30तो जैसे ये पक्का है कि मैं शरीर नहीं हूँ , मैं आत्मा हूँ और कौन ­ सी आत्मा हूँ , ये भी पक्का है , ऐसे निश्चयबुद्धि की विजय भी इतनी निश्चित है . tō jaisē yē pakkā hai ki maĩ śharīr nahī̃ hū̃ , maĩ ātmā hū̃ aur kaun ­ see|sī|C ātmā hū̃ , yē bhī pakkā hai , aisē niśhchaybuddhi kī|key vijay bhī itnī niśhchit hai . tō jaisā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] yah[pn.pl.d.] pakkā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] ki[conj.] maĩ[pn.sg.d.] śharīr[n.m.;sg.,d.] nahī̃[neg] hōnā[pres.sg.1] , maĩ ātmā hū̃[x] aur kaun[pn.;d.] ­ see|sā[adj.ā=>ī;f.]|C ātmā[n.f.;sg.] hōnā[pres.sg.1] , yah[pn.pl.d.] bhī[p.] pakkā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] , aisā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] niśhchaybuddhi[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] karnā[past-part.f.]|kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|key vijay[n.m.;sg.,d.] bhī[p.] itnā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] niśhchit[adj.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] . then like this firm be[pres.sg.23] that I body not be[pres.sg.1] , I am a soul and who ­ (see|x) soul be[pres.sg.1] , this too firm be[pres.sg.23] , such intellect with faith (do[past-part.f.]|of|key) victory too such fixed be[pres.sg.23] .

54Or, would you try to convince him? 55Just as you have made it firm that you are not a body but a soul, and that you have also made it firm what type of soul you are, so too, for souls who have such faith in the intellect, their victory is also guaranteed to that extent.

31हार असम्भव है और विजय निश्चित है . hār asambhav hai aur vijay niśhchit hai . hār[n.m.;sg.,d.]|hār[n.m.;sg.,d.]|hārnā[root] asambhav[adj.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] aur vijay[n.m.;sg.,d.] niśhchit[adj.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] . (x|x[root]) impossible be[pres.sg.23] and victory fixed be[pres.sg.23] .

56Defeat is impossible and victory is guaranteed.

32और ये भी निश्चित है कि बातें भी अन्त तक आनी हैं . aur yē bhī niśhchit hai ki bātē̃ bhī ant tak ānī haĩ . aur yah[pn.pl.d.] bhī[p.] niśhchit[adj.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] ki[conj.] bāt[n.f.+ē̃;pl.d.] bhī[p.] ant[n.m.;sg.,d.] tak ānā[pres.pl.12hon3.oblig1] . and this too fixed be[pres.sg.23] that matter too end until come[pres.pl.12hon3.oblig1] . 33लेकिन उसमें विजयी बनने के लिए एक ही समय पर चारों ही तरफ का निश्चय पक्का चाहिये . lēkin usmē̃ vijayī bannē kē liē ēk hī samay par chārō̃ hī taraph kā niśhchay pakkā chāhiyē . lēkin vah[pn.sg.mē̃] vijayī[adj.] bannā[inf.m.pl.,o.] kē liē[x] ēk[adj.] hī[p.] samay[n.m.;sg.,d.] par[postp.]|par[adj.] chārō̃ hī[p.] taraph[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] niśhchay[n.m.;sg.,d.] pakkā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] chāhiē . but that[.mē̃] victorious become[inf.m.pl.,o.] for one only time (at|other) x only direction of faith firm should .

57When any type of situation comes in front of you, and it is also certain that things will come in front of you till the end, there should be a faithful intellect in all four aspects. 58The faith should be firm in all four aspects simultaneously.

34तीन में निश्चय है और एक में नहीं है तो विजय निश्चित नहीं है लेकिन मेहनत से विजय होगी . tīn mē̃ niśhchay hai aur ēk mē̃ nahī̃ hai tō vijay niśhchit nahī̃ hai lēkin mēhnat sē vijay hōgī . tīn[adj.] mē̃[postp.] niśhchay[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] aur ēk[adj.] mē̃[postp.] nahī̃[neg] hōnā[pres.sg.23] tō vijay[n.m.;sg.,d.] niśhchit[adj.] nahī̃[neg] hōnā[pres.sg.23] lēkin mēhnat[n.f.;sg.] sē[postp.] vijay[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[fut.f.sg.23] . x in faith be[pres.sg.23] and one in not be[pres.sg.23] then victory fixed not be[pres.sg.23] but effort from victory be[fut.f.sg.23] .

59If you have faith in three and not in one, then victory is not guaranteed, but you would attain victory through having to make effort.

35निश्चित विजय वाले को मेहनत नहीं करनी पड़ेगी . niśhchit vijay vālē kō mēhnat nahī̃ karnī paṛēgī . niśhchit[adj.] vijay[n.m.;sg.,d.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] kō[postp.] mēhnat[n.f.;sg.] nahī̃[neg] karnā[fut.f.sg.23.oblig2] . fixed victory those who to effort not do[fut.f.sg.23.oblig2] .

60Those who have guaranteed victory will not have to make any effort.

36कई बार कई कहते हैं बापदादा तो बहुत अच्छा , वो तो पक्का है कि बाप है और हम बच्चे हैं , हमारा बाप से ही सम्बन्ध है लेकिन दैवी परिवार में खिटखिट होती है , उसमें निश्चय डगमग हो जाता है इसीलिये परिवार को छोड़ देते हैं , हल्का कर देते हैं . kaī bār kaī kahtē haĩ bāpdādā tō bahut achchhā , vō tō pakkā hai ki bāp hai aur ham bachchē haĩ , hamārā bāp sē hī sambandh hai lēkin daivī parivār mē̃ khiṭkhiṭ hōtī hai , usmē̃ niśhchay ḍagmag hō jātā hai isīliyē parivār kō chhōṛ dētē haĩ , halkā kar dētē haĩ . kaī bār[n.f.;sg.] kaī kahnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] bāpdādā tō bahut achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] , vah[pn.;d.] tō pakkā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] ki[conj.] bāp[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] aur ham[pn.pl.] bachchā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] , ham[pn.pl.kā] bāp[n.m.;sg.,d.] sē[postp.] hī[p.] sambandh[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] lēkin daivī parivār[x] mē̃[postp.] khiṭ-khiṭ hōnā[pres.sg.f.23] , vah[pn.sg.mē̃] niśhchay[n.m.;sg.,d.] ḍagmag[adj.] hōnā[pres.sg.m.23.root+jānā] isliē parivār[n.m.;sg.,d.] kō[postp.] chhōṛnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3.root+dēnā] , halkā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] karnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3.root+dēnā] . some time some say[pres.pl.m.12hon3] BapDada then very achcha , that then firm be[pres.sg.23] that father be[pres.sg.23] and we child be[pres.pl.12hon3] , we[.kā] father from only relationship be[pres.sg.23] but divine family in complication be[pres.sg.f.23] , that[.mē̃] faith rocking be[pres.sg.m.23.root+jānā] therefore family to renounce[pres.pl.m.12hon3.root+dēnā] , light do[pres.pl.m.12hon3.root+dēnā] .

61Many times, many of you say: BapDada is very good. 62It is fixed that there is Baba and there are we children, and we have a relationship with the Father alone, but that there is conflict with the divine family. 63Your faith fluctuates in this and therefore you leave the family aside. 64You become slack in that and make the relationship with the Father very strong.

37तो एक साइड ढीला हो गया ना . tō ēk side ḍhīlā hō gayā nā . tō ēk[adj.] side ḍhīlā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[past-part.m.sg.d..root+jānā] nā . then one side x be[past-part.m.sg.d..root+jānā] ∅ .

65But, one side has become slack.

38बिना परिवार के माला में कैसे आयेंगे  ? binā parivār kē|K mālā mē̃ kaisē āyēṅgē  ? binā parivār[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K mālā[n.f.;sg.] mē̃[postp.] kaisā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] ānā[fut.m.pl.12hon3]  ? without family (of|K) garland in how come[fut.m.pl.12hon3]  ?

66Do you wish to come into the rosary without the family? 67Do you wish to come into the rosary?

39माला कब बनती है  ? mālā kab bantī hai  ? mālā[n.f.;sg.] kab bannā[pres.sg.f.23]  ? garland when become[pres.sg.f.23]  ?

68Do all of you wish to come? 69Achcha.

40जब दाना दाने से मिलता है और एक ही धागे में पिरोये हुए होते हैं . jab dānā dānē sē miltā hai aur ēk hī dhāgē mē̃ pirōyē huē hōtē haĩ . jab dānā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] dānā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] sē[postp.] milnā[pres.sg.m.23] aur ēk[adj.] hī[p.] dhāgā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] mē̃[postp.] pirōnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.] hōnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.] hōnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] . when bead bead from receive[pres.sg.m.23] and one only thread in be threaded[past-part.m.pl.,o.] be[past-part.m.pl.,o.] be[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

70Do you wish to come into the 108 or 16,000? 71You wish to come into the 108 and there are 3,000 of you sitting here.

41अगर अलग ­ अलग धागे में अलग ­ अलग दाना हो तो उसको माला नहीं कहेंगे . agar alag ­ alag dhāgē mē̃ alag ­ alag dānā hō tō uskō mālā nahī̃ kahē̃gē . agar alag[adj.] ­ alag[adj.] dhāgā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] mē̃[postp.] alag[adj.] ­ alag[adj.] dānā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] tō vah[pn.sg.kō] mālā[n.f.;sg.] nahī̃[neg] kahnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] . if separate ­ separate thread in separate ­ separate bead (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) then that[.kō] garland not say[fut.m.pl.12hon3] .

72So, out of the 3,000, who will come into the 108? 73All of you will come! 74Then the numbers within the rosary will increase.

42तो परिवार है माला . tō parivār hai mālā . tō parivār[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] mālā[n.f.;sg.] . then family be[pres.sg.23] garland .

75When is a rosary created?

43अगर परिवार को छोड़कर तीन निश्चय पक्के हैं तो भी विजय निश्चित नहीं है . agar parivār kō chhōṛkar tīn niśhchay pakkē haĩ tō bhī vijay niśhchit nahī̃ hai . agar parivār[n.m.;sg.,d.] kō[postp.] chhōṛnā[abs.] tīn[adj.] niśhchay[n.m.;sg.,d.] pakkā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] tō bhī[x] vijay[n.m.;sg.,d.] niśhchit[adj.] nahī̃[neg] hōnā[pres.sg.23] . if family to renounce[abs.] x faith firm be[pres.pl.12hon3] ∅ victory fixed not be[pres.sg.23] .

76When a bead is close to another bead and they are threaded on the one thread. 77If they are separate beads on separate threads, would you call that a rosary?

44चलो परिवार की खिटखिट से किनारा कर लो , बाप का सहारा हो , परिवार का किनारा हो , तो चलेगा  ? chalō parivār kī|key khiṭkhiṭ sē kinārā kar lō , bāp kā sahārā hō , parivār kā kinārā hō , tō chalēgā  ? chalnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] parivār[n.m.;sg.,d.] karnā[past-part.f.]|kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|key khiṭ-khiṭ sē[postp.] kinārā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] karnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2.root+lēnā] , bāp[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] sahārā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] , parivār[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] kinārā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] , tō chalnā[fut.m.sg.23]  ? continue[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] family (do[past-part.f.]|of|key) complication from x do[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2.root+lēnā] , father of support (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) , family of x (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) , then continue[fut.m.sg.23]  ?

78So the family is a rosary. 79If you leave the family aside and become strong in the other three types of faith, then also, victory is not guaranteed.

45काम तो बाप से है या भाइयों से है  ? kām tō bāp sē hai yā bhāiyō̃ sē hai  ? kām[n.m.;sg.,d.]|kām[n.m.;sg.,d.] tō bāp[n.m.;sg.,d.] sē[postp.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] yā bhāī[n.m.+ō̃;pl.o.] sē[postp.] hōnā[pres.sg.23]  ? (task|lust) then father from be[pres.sg.23] or brother from be[pres.sg.23]  ?

80"Let me move away from the conflict of the family. 81Baba is my Support."

46बाप से काम है , वर्सा बाप से मिलना है , भाई ­ बहनों से क्या मिलेगा  ? bāp sē kām hai , varsā bāp sē milnā hai , bhāī ­ bahanō̃ sē kyā milēgā  ? bāp[n.m.;sg.,d.] sē[postp.] kām[n.m.;sg.,d.]|kām[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] , varsā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] bāp[n.m.;sg.,d.] sē[postp.] milnā[pres.sg.23.oblig1] , bhāī[n.m.;sg.,d.]|bhānā[past-part.f.] ­ bahan ou bahin[n.f.+ō̃;pl.o.] sē[postp.] kyā milnā[fut.m.sg.23]  ? father from (task|lust) be[pres.sg.23] , inheritance father from receive[pres.sg.23.oblig1] , (brother|be liked[past-part.f.]) ­ x from what receive[fut.m.sg.23]  ?

82If you move away from the family, will this do? 83Will it not do? 84Are you concerned with the Father or the brothers?

47लेकिन ब्राह्मण जीवन में यही न्यारापन है कि धर्म और राज्य दोनों की स्थापना होती है , सिर्फ धर्म की नहीं . lēkin brāhmaṇ jīvan mē̃ yahī nyārāpan hai ki dharm aur rājya dōnō̃ kī|key sthāpanā hōtī hai , sirph dharm kī|key nahī̃ . lēkin brāhmaṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.] jīvan[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] yahī[pn.;d.] nyārēpan[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] ki[conj.] dharm[n.m.;sg.,d.] aur rājya[n.m.;sg.,d.] dōnō̃ karnā[past-part.f.]|kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|key sthāpanā, sthāpan[n.f.;sg.] hōnā[pres.sg.f.23] , sirph[adj.] dharm[n.m.;sg.,d.] karnā[past-part.f.]|kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|key nahī̃[neg] . but Brahmin life in this separation be[pres.sg.23] that religion and kingdom x (do[past-part.f.]|of|key) establishment be[pres.sg.f.23] , only religion (do[past-part.f.]|of|key) not .

85You are concerned with the Father. 86You are to receive the inheritance from the Father, what would you receive from the brothers and sisters?

48और धर्म पितायें सिर्फ धर्म की स्थापना करते हैं , बाप की विशेषता है धर्म और राज्य की स्थापना करना . aur dharm pitāyē̃ sirph dharm kī|key sthāpanā kartē haĩ , bāp kī|key viśhēṣhtā hai dharm aur rājya kī sthāpanā karnā . aur dharm[n.m.;sg.,d.] pitā[n.f.+ē̃;pl.d.] sirph[adj.] dharm[n.m.;sg.,d.] karnā[past-part.f.]|kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|key sthāpanā, sthāpan[n.f.;sg.] karnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] , bāp[n.m.;sg.,d.] karnā[past-part.f.]|kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|key viśhēṣhtā[n.f.;sg.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] dharm[n.m.;sg.,d.] aur rājya karnā[past-part.f.] sthāpanā, sthāpan[n.f.;sg.] karnā[inf.m.sg.d.] . and religion father only religion (do[past-part.f.]|of|key) establishment do[pres.pl.m.12hon3] , father (do[past-part.f.]|of|key) speciality be[pres.sg.23] religion and x establishment do[inf.m.sg.d.] .

87However, it is the uniqueness within Brahmin life that both the religion and the kingdom are established. 88It is not just a religion that is established.

49तो राज्य में एक राजा क्या करेगा  ? tō rājya mē̃ ēk rājā kyā karēgā  ? tō rājya[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] ēk[adj.] rājā[n.m.;sg.,d.] kyā karnā[fut.m.sg.23]  ? then kingdom in one king what do[fut.m.sg.23]  ?

89All other religious founders simply establish a religion.

50बहुत अच्छा तख्त भी हो , ताज भी हो , क्या करेगा  ? bahut achchhā takht bhī hō , tāj bhī hō , kyā karēgā  ? bahut achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] takht[n.m.;sg.,d.] bhī[p.] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] , tāj[n.m.;sg.,d.] bhī[p.] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] , kyā karnā[fut.m.sg.23]  ? very achcha throne too (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) , crown too (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) , what do[fut.m.sg.23]  ?

90The Father's speciality is that He establishes both a religion and a kingdom. 91This is why you call it Easy Raja Yoga.

51राजधानी भी चाहिये ना  ? rājdhānī bhī chāhiyē nā  ? rājdhānī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] bhī[p.] chāhiē nā  ? kingdom too should ∅  ?

92What would one king do alone in a kingdom?

52तो राजधानी अर्थात् ब्राह्मण परिवार सो राज परिवार . tō rājdhānī arthāt brāhmaṇ parivār sō rāj parivār . tō rājdhānī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] arthāt brāhmaṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.] parivār[n.m.;sg.,d.] sōnā[root]|sō rāj[n.m.;sg.,d.] parivār[n.m.;sg.,d.] . then kingdom that is Brahmin family (sleep[root]|x) x family .

93Even if he has a very good throne and crown, what could he do? 94A kingdom is needed.

53इसलिए ब्राह्मण परिवार में हर परिस्थिति में निश्चयबुद्धि , तब राज्य ­ भाग्य में भी सदा राज्य अधिकारी होंगे . isliē brāhmaṇ parivār mē̃ har|her paristhiti mē̃ niśhchaybuddhi , tab rājya ­ bhāgya mē̃ bhī sadā rājya adhikārī hōṅgē . isliē brāhmaṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.] parivār[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] har|harnā[root]|her paristhiti[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] mē̃[postp.] niśhchaybuddhi[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] , tab rājya[n.m.;sg.,d.] ­ bhāgya[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] bhī[p.] sadā rājya adhikārī[x] hōnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] . therefore Brahmin family in (x|x[root]) circumstances in intellect with faith , for only then kingdom ­ x in too constantly master be[fut.m.pl.12hon3] .

95A kingdom means a Brahmin family and so the ruling family. 96You have faith in the intellect in every situation within the Brahmin family and so in terms of the fortune of the kingdom also, you constantly have a right to the kingdom.

54तो ऐसे नहीं समझना-कोई बात नहीं , परिवार से नहीं बनती है , बाप से तो बनती है  ! tō aisē nahī̃ samajhanā-kōī bāt nahī̃ , parivār sē nahī̃ bantī hai , bāp sē tō bantī hai  ! tō aisē nahī̃[x] x bāt[n.f.;sg.] nahī̃[neg] , parivār[n.m.;sg.,d.] sē[postp.] nahī̃[neg] bannā[pres.sg.f.23] , bāp[n.m.;sg.,d.] sē[postp.] tō bannā[pres.sg.f.23]  ! then it isn't that x matter not , family from not become[pres.sg.f.23] , father from then become[pres.sg.f.23]  !

97Do not think that it does not matter if you are not able to get along well with the family, but that you are getting on fine with the Father.

55ड्रामा अगर भूल जाता है तो बाप तो याद रहता ही है  ! drama agar bhūl jātā hai tō bāp tō yād rahtā hī hai  ! drama agar bhūl jānā[pres.sg.m.23] tō bāp[n.m.;sg.,d.] tō yād[n.f.;sg.] rahnā[pres-part.m.sg.d.] hī[p.] hōnā[pres.sg.23]  ! drama if x[pres.sg.m.23] then father then remembrance remain[pres-part.m.sg.d.] only be[pres.sg.23]  !

98"What does it matter if you forget the drama, because you remember the Father anyway?"

56लेकिन कोई भी कमज़ोरी एक ही समय पर होती है , स्व स्थिति अर्थात् स्वय्निश्चय भी अगर कमज़ोर होता है तो विजय निश्चित के बजाय हलचल में आ जाती है . lēkin kōī bhī kamzōrī ēk hī samay par hōtī hai , sva sthiti arthāt svayniścay bhī agar kamzōr hōtā hai tō vijay niśhchit kē|K bajāy halchal mē̃ ā jātī hai . lēkin kōī bhī[x] kamjōrī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] ēk[adj.] hī[p.] samay[n.m.;sg.,d.] par[postp.]|par[adj.] hōnā[pres.sg.f.23] , sva sthiti[n.f.;sg.] arthāt x bhī[p.] agar kamjōr[adj.] hōnā[pres.sg.m.23] tō vijay[n.m.;sg.,d.] niśhchit[adj.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K bajāē halchal[x] mē̃[postp.] ānā[pres.sg.f.23.root+jānā] . but anyone weakness one only time (at|other) be[pres.sg.f.23] , x stage that is x too if weak be[pres.sg.m.23] then victory fixed (of|K) x upheaval in come[pres.sg.f.23.root+jānā] .

99If you become weak in your own stage, that is, when you are weak in having faith in the self, when any weakness comes at any time, then, instead of your victory being guaranteed, there is fluctuation in it.

57तो बापदादा निश्चय के फाउण्डेशन को चेक कर रहे थे . tō bāpdādā niśhchay kē|K foundation kō check kar rahē thē . tō bāpdādā niśhchay[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K foundation kō[postp.] check karnā[root] rahnā[past-perf.pl.m.] . then BapDada faith (of|K) foundation to check do[root] remain[past-perf.pl.m.] .

100BapDada was checking the foundation of faith.

58क्या देखा  ? kyā dēkhā  ? kyā dēkhnā[past-part.m.sg.d.]  ? what see[past-part.m.sg.d.]  ?

101What did He see?

59सदा चार ही प्रकार का निश्चय एक समय पर साथ नहीं रहता , कभी रहता कभी हिलता इसलिये सदा विजयी का अनुभव नहीं कर पाते हैं . sadā chār hī prakār kā niśhchay ēk samay par sāth nahī̃ rahtā , kabhī rahtā kabhī hiltā isliyē sadā vijayī kā anubhav nahī̃ kar pātē haĩ . sadā chār[adj.] hī[p.] prakār[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] niśhchay[n.m.;sg.,d.] ēk[adj.] samay[n.m.;sg.,d.] par[postp.]|par[adj.] sāth[n.m.;sg.,d.] nahī̃[neg] rahnā[pres-part.m.sg.d.] , kabhī[adv.] rahnā[pres-part.m.sg.d.] kabhī[adv.] hilnā[pres-part.m.sg.d.] isliē sadā vijayī[adj.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] anubhav[n.m.;sg.,d.] nahī̃[neg] karnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3.root+pānā] . constantly four only form of faith one time (at|other) with not remain[pres-part.m.sg.d.] , ever remain[pres-part.m.sg.d.] ever x[pres-part.m.sg.d.] therefore constantly victorious of experience not do[pres.pl.m.12hon3.root+pānā] .

102You are not constantly able to have all four types of faith at the same time. 103Sometimes, you have this and sometimes there is fluctuation and you are therefore not able to have the experience of constantly being victorious.

60फिर सोचते हैं-होना तो ये चाहिये लेकिन पता नहीं क्यों नहीं हुआ  ? phir sōchtē haĩ-hōnā tō yē chāhiyē lēkin patā nahī̃ kyō̃ nahī̃ huā  ? phirnā[root]|phir[adv.] sōchnā[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] x tō yah[pn.pl.d.] chāhiē lēkin patā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] nahī̃[neg] kyō̃ nahī̃[neg] hōnā[past-part.m.sg.d.]  ? (turn[root]|then) think[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] x then this should but knowledge not why not be[past-part.m.sg.d.]  ?

104Then you think: "This should have happened, and I don't know why it didn't happen. 105I made a lot of effort.

61किया तो बहुत मेहनत , सोचा तो बहुत अच्छा … लेकिन सोचना और होना इसमें अन्तर पड़ जाता है . kiyā tō bahut mēhnat , sōchā tō bahut achchhā … lēkin sōchnā aur hōnā ismē̃ antar paṛ jātā hai . karnā[past-part.m.sg.d.] tō bahut mēhnat[n.f.;sg.] , sōchnā[past-part.m.sg.d.] tō bahut achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] … lēkin sōchnā[inf.m.sg.d.] aur hōnā[inf.m.sg.d.] yah[pn.sg.mē̃] antar[n.m.;sg.,d.] paṛnā[pres.sg.m.23.root+jānā] . do[past-part.m.sg.d.] then very effort , think[past-part.m.sg.d.] then very achcha … but think[inf.m.sg.d.] and be[inf.m.sg.d.] this[.mē̃] difference fall[pres.sg.m.23.root+jānā] .

106I thought about it very carefully, but..." 107There is then a "but". 108There is difference in your thinking and in it actually happening.

62इसका अर्थ ही है कि निश्चय के चारों तरफ मजबूत नहीं हैं . iskā arth|earth hī hai ki niśhchay kē|K chārō̃ taraph majbūt nahī̃ haĩ . yah[pn.sg.kā] arth[n.m.;sg.,d.]|earth hī[p.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] ki[conj.] niśhchay[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K chārō̃ taraph[x] majbūt[adj.] nahī̃[neg] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] . this[.kā] (meaning|earth) only be[pres.sg.23] that faith (of|K) everywhere x not be[pres.pl.12hon3] .

109This means that all four sides of faith are not strong.

63और हंसी की बात तो ये है कि ड्रामा भी कह रहे हैं , है तो ड्रामा , है तो ड्रामा … लेकिन अच्छी तरह से हिल भी रहे हैं . aur hansī kī bāt tō yē hai ki drama bhī kah rahē haĩ , hai tō drama , hai tō drama … lēkin achchhī tarah sē hil bhī rahē haĩ . aur hãsnā[past-part.f..past-part+karnā] bāt[n.f.;sg.] tō yah[pn.pl.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] ki[conj.] drama bhī[p.] kahnā[pres.pl.m.prog.12hon3] , hōnā[pres.sg.23] tō drama , hōnā[pres.sg.23] tō drama … lēkin achchhā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] tarah[n.f.;sg.] sē[postp.] hilnā[root] bhī[p.] rahnā[pres-perf.pl.m.12hon3] . and laugh out[past-part.f..past-part+karnā] matter then this be[pres.sg.23] that drama too say[pres.pl.m.prog.12hon3] , be[pres.sg.23] then drama , be[pres.sg.23] then drama … but achcha x from x[root] too remain[pres-perf.pl.m.12hon3] .

110And the amusing thing is that you say that it is the drama, "It is the drama, it is the drama", and yet, at the same time, you are also fluctuating a great deal.

64कभी संकल्प में हिलते , कभी बोल तक भी हिल जाते , कभी कर्म तक भी आ जाते . kabhī saṅkalp mē̃ hiltē , kabhī bōl tak bhī hil jātē , kabhī karma tak bhī ā jātē . kabhī[adv.] saṅkalp[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] hilnā[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] , kabhī[adv.] bōl[n.m.;sg.,d.]|bōlnā[root] tak bhī[p.] hilnā[root] jānā[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] , kabhī[adv.] karm[n.m.;sg.,d.] tak bhī[p.] ānā[root] jānā[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] . ever thought in x[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] , ever (x|speak[root]) until too x[root] go[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] , ever deed until too come[root] go[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] .

111Sometimes there is fluctuation in your thoughts, sometimes there is fluctuation in your words and sometimes there is even fluctuation in your actions.

65उस समय क्या लगता होगा , दृश्य सामने लाओ , ड्रामा ­ ड्रामा भी कह रहे हैं और हिलडुल भी रहे हैं  ! us samay kyā lagtā hōgā , dr̥iśhya sāmnē lāō , drama ­ drama bhī kah rahē haĩ aur hilaḍul bhī rahē haĩ  ! vah[pn.sg.o.] samay[n.m.;sg.,d.] kyā lagnā[pres-part.m.sg.d.] hōnā[fut.m.sg.23] , dr̥iśhya[n.m.;sg.,d.] sāmnē lānā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] , drama ­ drama bhī[p.] kahnā[pres.pl.m.prog.12hon3] aur x bhī[p.] rahnā[pres-perf.pl.m.12hon3]  ! that time what x[pres-part.m.sg.d.] be[fut.m.sg.23] , x x x[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] , drama ­ drama too say[pres.pl.m.prog.12hon3] and x too remain[pres-perf.pl.m.12hon3]  !

112What would it seem like at that time. 113Just bring this scene in front of you: you are saying that it is the drama, it is the drama and yet you are also fluctuating.

66लेकिन निश्चयबुद्धि की निशानी है निश्चित विजयी . lēkin niśhchaybuddhi kī|key niśhānī hai niśhchit vijayī . lēkin niśhchaybuddhi[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] karnā[past-part.f.]|kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|key niśhānī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] niśhchit[adj.] vijayī[adj.] . but intellect with faith (do[past-part.f.]|of|key) sign be[pres.sg.23] fixed victorious .

114So what were you told is the sign of having faith in the intellect?

67अगर विधि ठीक है तो सिद्धि प्राप्त न हो , ये हो नहीं सकता . agar vidhi ṭhīk hai tō siddhi prāpt na hō , yē hō nahī̃ saktā . agar vidhi[n.m.;sg.,d.] ṭhīk[adj.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] tō siddhi[x] prāpt[adj.] na[neg] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] , yah[pn.pl.d.] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] nahī̃[neg] saknā[pres-part.m.sg.d.] . if method OK be[pres.sg.23] then success reached not (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) , this (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) not can[pres-part.m.sg.d.] .

115Guaranteed victory. 116If the method is accurate, it impossible for you not to attain success.

68तो जब भी कोई भी कार्य में विजय प्राप्त नहीं होती है तो समझ लो कि निश्चय की कमी है . tō jab bhī kōī bhī kārya mē̃ vijay prāpt nahī̃ hōtī hai tō samajh lō ki niśhchay kī kamī hai . tō jab bhī[p.] kōī bhī[x] kārya[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] vijay[n.m.;sg.,d.] prāpt[adj.] nahī̃[neg] hōnā[pres.sg.f.23] tō samajhnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2.root+lēnā] ki[conj.] niśhchay karnā[past-part.f.] kamī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] . then when too anyone task in victory reached not be[pres.sg.f.23] then understand[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2.root+lēnā] that have the faith x be[pres.sg.23] .

117Whenever you do not attain success in any task, then understand that you are lacking in faith. 118Check all four sides, not just one side.

69चारों ओर चेक करो , एक ओर नहीं . chārō̃ ōr check karō , ēk ōr nahī̃ . chārō̃ ōr[x] check karnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] , ēk[adj.] ōr nahī̃[neg] . everywhere check do[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] , one direction not . 70और बात , निश्चयबुद्धि की निशानी जैसे निश्चित विजय है वैसे निश्चिन्त होंगे . aur bāt , niśhchaybuddhi kī|key niśhānī jaisē niśhchit vijay hai vaisē niśhchinta hōṅgē . aur bāt[n.f.;sg.] , niśhchaybuddhi[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] karnā[past-part.f.]|kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|key niśhānī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] jaisā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] niśhchit[adj.] vijay[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] vaisā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] niśhchint[x] hōnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] . and matter , intellect with faith (do[past-part.f.]|of|key) sign like fixed victory be[pres.sg.23] x without worry be[fut.m.pl.12hon3] .

119And, secondly, just as the sign of having faith in the intellect is guaranteed victory, in the same way, such souls will be carefree.

71कोई भी व्यर्थ चिन्तन आ ही नहीं सकता . kōī bhī vyarth chintan ā hī nahī̃ saktā . kōī bhī[x] vyarth[n.m.;sg.,d.] chintan[n.m.;sg.,d.] ānā[root] hī[p.] nahī̃[neg] saknā[pres-part.m.sg.d.] . anyone wasteful churning come[root] only not can[pres-part.m.sg.d.] .

120They cannot have any type of wasteful thinking.

72सिवाए शुभ चिन्तन के व्यर्थ का नामय्निशान नहीं होगा . sivāē śhubh chintan kē|K vyarth kā nāmayniśān nahī̃ hōgā . sivāē śhubh chintan[x] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K vyarth[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] x nahī̃[neg] hōnā[fut.m.sg.23] . except pure and positive thoughts (of|K) wasteful of x not be[fut.m.sg.23] .

121Apart from having pure thoughts, there will be no type of name or trace of any wasteful thoughts.

73ऐसे नहीं , व्यर्थ आया , भगाया . aisē nahī̃ , vyarth āyā , bhagāyā . aisē nahī̃[x] , vyarth[n.m.;sg.,d.] ānā[past-part.m.sg.d.] , bhagānā[past-part.m.sg.d.] . it isn't that , wasteful come[past-part.m.sg.d.] , chase away[past-part.m.sg.d.] .

122It would not be that waste thoughts came and that they had to be chased away.

74निश्चयबुद्धि के आगे व्यर्थ आ नहीं सकता . niśhchaybuddhi kē āgē vyarth ā nahī̃ saktā . niśhchaybuddhi[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] kē āgē[x] vyarth[n.m.;sg.,d.] ānā[root] nahī̃[neg] saknā[pres-part.m.sg.d.] . intellect with faith in front of wasteful come[root] not can[pres-part.m.sg.d.] .

123No waste can come to those who have faith in the intellect.

75क्योंकि क्यों , क्या , और कैसे-ये व्यर्थ होता है . kyōṅki kyō̃ , kyā , aur kaisē-yē vyarth hōtā hai . kyōṅki kyō̃ , kyā , aur x vyarth[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.m.23] . because why , what , and x wasteful be[pres.sg.m.23] .

124After all, what is wasteful thinking? 125How? why? what? etc. these are the wasteful thoughts that are created.

76जब ड्रामा के राज को जानते हैं , आदि ­ मध्य ­ अन्त को जानने वाले हैं तो जो ड्रामा के आदि ­ मध्य ­ अन्त को जानने वाले हैं वो छोटी ­ सी बात के आदि ­ मध्य ­ अन्त को नहीं जान सकते  ! jab drama kē|K rāj kō jāntē haĩ , ādi ­ madhya ­ ant kō jānnē vālē haĩ tō jō drama kē|K ādi ­ madhya ­ ant kō jānnē vālē haĩ vō chhōṭī ­ see|sī|C bāt kē|K ādi ­ madhya ­ ant kō nahī̃ jān saktē  ! jab drama kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K rāj[n.m.;sg.,d.] kō[postp.] jānnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] , ādi[adj.] ­ madhya[n.m.;sg.,d.] ­ ant[n.m.;sg.,d.] kō[postp.] jānnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] tō jō[pn.;d.] drama kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K ādi[adj.] ­ madhya[n.m.;sg.,d.] ­ ant[n.m.;sg.,d.] kō[postp.] jānnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] vah[pn.;d.] chhōṭā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] ­ see|sā[adj.ā=>ī;f.]|C bāt[n.f.;sg.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K ādi[adj.] ­ madhya[n.m.;sg.,d.] ­ ant[n.m.;sg.,d.] kō[postp.] nahī̃[neg] jān[n.m.;sg.,d.]|jānnā[root] saknā[pres-part.m.pl.,o.]  ! when drama (of|K) x to know[pres.pl.m.12hon3] , etc. ­ middle ­ end to know[inf.m.pl.,o.] those who be[pres.pl.12hon3] then that drama (of|K) etc. ­ middle ­ end to know[inf.m.pl.,o.] those who be[pres.pl.12hon3] that small ­ (see|x) matter (of|K) etc. ­ middle ­ end to not (x|know[root]) can[pres-part.m.pl.,o.]  !

126When you know the significance of the drama, when you are those who know the beginning, the middle and the end, then can those who know the beginning, the middle and the end of the drama not know the beginning, the middle and the end of a small situation?

77न जानने के कारण क्यों , क्या , कैसे , ऐसे-ये व्यर्थ संकल्प चलते हैं . na jānnē kē|K kāraṇ kyō̃ , kyā , kaisē , aisē-yē vyarth saṅkalp chaltē haĩ . na[neg] jānnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K kāraṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.] kyō̃ , kyā , kaisā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] , x vyarth[n.m.;sg.,d.] saṅkalp[n.m.;sg.,d.] chalnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] . not know[inf.m.pl.,o.] (of|K) because why , what , how , x wasteful thought continue[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

127Because of not knowing, you have the wasteful thoughts of how? why? what? etc.

78अगर ड्रामा में अटल निश्चय है , नॉलेजफुल भी हैं , पॉवरफुल भी हैं तो व्यर्थ संकल्प हिलाने की हिम्मत भी नहीं रख सकते . agar drama mē̃ aṭal niśhchay hai , knowledgeful bhī haĩ , powerful bhī haĩ tō vyarth saṅkalp hilānē kī|key himmat bhī nahī̃ rakh saktē . agar drama mē̃[postp.] aṭal[adj.] niśhchay[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] , knowledgeful bhī[p.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] , powerful bhī[p.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] tō vyarth[n.m.;sg.,d.] saṅkalp[n.m.;sg.,d.] hilānā[inf.m.pl.,o.] karnā[past-part.f.]|kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|key himmat[n.m.;sg.,d.] bhī[p.] nahī̃[neg] rakhnā[root] saknā[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] . if drama in unshakeable faith be[pres.sg.23] , knowledgeful too be[pres.pl.12hon3] , powerful too be[pres.pl.12hon3] then wasteful thought make fluctuate[inf.m.pl.,o.] (do[past-part.f.]|of|key) courage too not keep[root] can[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] .

128If you have unshakeable faith in the drama, if you are knowledgeful and powerful, then would wasteful thoughts have any courage to make you fluctuate? 129Could they have this courage?

79परन्तु जब हिलते हैं तो सोचते हैं पता नहीं क्या हो गया  ! parantu jab hiltē haĩ tō sōchtē haĩ patā nahī̃ kyā hō gayā  ! parantu[conj.] jab hilnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] tō sōchnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] patā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] nahī̃[neg] kyā hōnā[past-part.m.sg.d..root+jānā]  ! however when x[pres.pl.m.12hon3] then think[pres.pl.m.12hon3] knowledge not what be[past-part.m.sg.d..root+jānā]  !

130But they do have this courage, do they not? 131Then you think: I don't know what happened.

80तो बापदादा हंसते हैं कि ड्रामा के आदि ­ मध्य ­ अन्त को जान लिया , अपने 84 जन्म को जान लिया और एक बात को नहीं जानते  ! tō bāpdādā hanstē haĩ ki drama kē|K ādi ­ madhya ­ ant kō jān liyā , apnē 84 janm kō jān liyā aur ēk bāt kō nahī̃ jāntē  ! tō bāpdādā hãsnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] ki[conj.] drama kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K ādi[adj.] ­ madhya[n.m.;sg.,d.] ­ ant[n.m.;sg.,d.] kō[postp.] jānnā[past-part.m.sg.d..root+lēnā] , apnā[pn.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] 84 janm[n.m.;sg.,d.]|janamnā[root] kō[postp.] jānnā[past-part.m.sg.d..root+lēnā] aur ēk[adj.] bāt[n.f.;sg.] kō[postp.] nahī̃[neg] jānnā[pres-part.m.pl.,o.]  ! then BapDada laugh out[pres.pl.m.12hon3] that drama (of|K) etc. ­ middle ­ end to know[past-part.m.sg.d..root+lēnā] , one’s own 84 (life|be born[root]) to know[past-part.m.sg.d..root+lēnā] and one matter to not know[pres-part.m.pl.,o.]  !

132Then BapDada is amused that you know the beginning, the middle and the end of the drama, that you know your eighty­four births and you do not know this one small thing.

81बड़े होशियार हो  ! baṛē hōśhiyār hō  ! baṛā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] hōśhiyār[adj.] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2]  ! very clever (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2])  !

133You are very clever!

82होशियारी दिखाते हो ना समय प्रति समय  ! hōśhiyārī dikhātē hō nā samay prati samay  ! hōśhiyārī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] dikhānā[pres.pl.m.2] nā samay[n.m.;sg.,d.] prati samay[n.m.;sg.,d.]  ! x x[pres.pl.m.2] ∅ time for time  !

134From time to time, you show your cleverness.

83कल्प वृक्ष के सभी पत्तों को जानते हो कि नहीं  ? kalpa vr̥ikṣha kē|K sabhī pattō̃ kō jāntē hō ki nahī̃  ? kalpa vr̥ikṣha[x] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K sab[adv.hī] pattā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] kō[postp.] jānnā[pres.pl.m.2] ki[conj.] nahī̃[neg]  ? kalpa tree (of|K) all leaf to know[pres.pl.m.2] that not  ?

135You know all the leaves of the tree, you know all the leaves of the kalpa tree, do you not? 136Or don't you?

84सभी वृक्ष के फाउण्डेशन में बैठे हो या 7-8 बैठे हैं  ? sabhī vr̥ikṣha kē|K foundation mē̃ baiṭhē hō yā 7-8 baiṭhē haĩ  ? sab[adv.hī] vr̥ikṣha[x] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K foundation mē̃[postp.] baiṭhnā[pres-perf.pl.m.2] yā 7-8 baiṭhnā[pres-perf.pl.m.12hon3]  ? all tree (of|K) foundation in sit[pres-perf.pl.m.2] or 7-8 sit[pres-perf.pl.m.12hon3]  ?

137Are all of you sitting at the foundation of the tree? 138Or are only seven or eight of you sitting there?

85तो जड़ में बैठे हुए वृक्ष को जानते हो  ? tō jaṛ mē̃ baiṭhē huē vr̥ikṣha kō jāntē hō  ? tō jaṛ[adj.]|jaṛ[n.f.;sg.]|jaṛnā[root] mē̃[postp.] baiṭhnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|baiṭhnā[opt.sg.23] hōnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.] vr̥ikṣha[x] kō[postp.] jānnā[pres.pl.m.2]  ? then (non-conscious|x|stud[root]) in (sit[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|sit[opt.sg.23]) be[past-part.m.pl.,o.] tree to know[pres.pl.m.2]  ?

139So, do those who are sitting at the roots know the tree?

86पत्ते ­ पत्ते को जानते हो और ये पता नहीं कैसे  ? pattē ­ pattē kō jāntē hō aur yē patā nahī̃ kaisē  ? pattā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] ­ pattā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] kō[postp.] jānnā[pres.pl.m.2] aur yah[pn.pl.d.] patā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] nahī̃[neg] kaisā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]  ? leaf ­ leaf to know[pres.pl.m.2] and this knowledge not how  ?

140How is it possible that you know every leaf and yet you do not know this?

87तो निश्चय की निशानियाँ निश्चिन्त स्थिति , इसका अनुभव करो . tō niśhchay kī niśhāniyā̃ niśhchinta sthiti , iskā anubhav karō . tō niśhchay karnā[past-part.f.] niśhānī[n.f.ī=>iyā̃;pl.d.] niśhchint[x] sthiti[n.f.;sg.] , yah[pn.sg.kā] anubhav[n.m.;sg.,d.] karnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] . then have the faith sign without worry stage , this[.kā] experience do[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

141So experience the sign of having faith which is the carefree stage. 142"Will it happen?

88होगा , नहीं होगा , क्या होगा , कर तो रहे हैं , देखें क्या होता है-इसको निश्चिन्त नहीं कहेंगे . hōgā , nahī̃ hōgā , kyā hōgā , kar tō rahē haĩ , dēkhē̃ kyā hōtā hai-isakō niśhchinta nahī̃ kahē̃gē . hōnā[fut.m.sg.23] , nahī̃[neg] hōnā[fut.m.sg.23] , kyā hōnā[fut.m.sg.23] , karnā[root] tō rahnā[pres-perf.pl.m.12hon3] , dēkhnā[opt.pl.12hon3] kyā hōnā[pres-part.m.sg.d.] x niśhchint[x] nahī̃[neg] kahnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] . be[fut.m.sg.23] , not be[fut.m.sg.23] , what be[fut.m.sg.23] , do[root] then remain[pres-perf.pl.m.12hon3] , see[opt.pl.12hon3] what be[pres-part.m.sg.d.] x without worry not say[fut.m.pl.12hon3] .

143Will it not happen? 144What will happen. 145We are doing it, but we shall see what happens". 146Would you call this being carefree?

89और फिर बाप के आगे ही फरियाद करते हैं-आप मददगार हो ना , आप रक्षक हो ना , आप ये हो ना , आप ये हो ना … . aur phir bāp kē āgē hī phariyād kartē haĩ-āp madadgār hō nā , āp rakṣhak hō nā , āp yē hō nā , āp yē hō nā … . aur phirnā[root]|phir[adv.] bāp[n.m.;sg.,d.] kē āgē[x] hī[p.] phariyād[n.f.;sg.] karnā[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] x madadgār[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] nā , āp[pn.pl.] rakṣhak[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] nā , āp[pn.pl.] yah[pn.pl.d.] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] nā , āp[pn.pl.] yah[pn.pl.d.] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] nā … . and (turn[root]|then) father in front of only complaint do[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] x helper (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) ∅ , you protector (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) ∅ , you this (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) ∅ , you this (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) ∅ … .

147Then, when you are not able to do anything, what do you do in front of the Father? 148You complain and beg, saying: You are our Helper. 149You are our Protector.

90फरियाद करना अर्थात् अधिकार गँवाना . phariyād karnā arthāt adhikār ganvānā . phariyād[n.f.;sg.] karnā[inf.m.sg.d.] arthāt adhikār[x] ganvānā[inf.m.sg.d.] . complaint do[inf.m.sg.d.] that is right lose[inf.m.sg.d.] .

150You are this, You are this. 151To beg means to lose your right.

91अधिकारी फरियाद नहीं करेंगे-ये कर लो ना , ये हो जाये ना . adhikārī phariyād nahī̃ karēṅgē-yē kar lō nā , yē hō jāyē nā . adhikārī[n.m.;sg.,d.] phariyād[n.f.;sg.] nahī̃[neg] x karnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2.root+lēnā] nā , yah[pn.pl.d.] hōnā[past-part.m.pl.,o..root+jānā] nā . (one) who has a right complaint not x do[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2.root+lēnā] ∅ , this be[past-part.m.pl.,o..root+jānā] ∅ .

152Those who have all rights would never beg and say: "Do this, or let this happen".

92तो निश्चयबुद्धि अर्थात् निश्चिन्त . tō niśhchaybuddhi arthāt niśhchinta . tō niśhchaybuddhi[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] arthāt niśhchint[x] . then intellect with faith that is without worry .

153To have an intellect that has faith means to be carefree.

93तो ये प्रैक्टिकल निशानियाँ अपने आपमें चेक करो . tō yē practical niśhāniyā̃ apnē āpmē̃ check karō . tō yah[pn.pl.d.] practical niśhānī[n.f.ī=>iyā̃;pl.d.] apnā[pn.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] āp[pn.pl.mē̃] check karnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] . then this practical sign one’s own you[.mē̃] check do[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

154So check whether you have these practical signs in yourself.

94ऐसे अलबेले नहीं रह जाना-हम तो हैं ही निश्चयबुद्धि . aisē albēlē nahī̃ rah jānā-ham tō haĩ hī niśhchaybuddhi . aisā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] albēlā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] nahī̃[neg] rahnā[root] x tō hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] hī[p.] niśhchaybuddhi[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] . such careless not remain[root] x then be[pres.pl.12hon3] only intellect with faith .

155Do not remain careless thinking: I have faith in the intellect anyway.

95कौन ­ सा निश्चयकमज़ोर है वो चेक करो और चेंज करो . kaun ­ sā niścayakamazōr hai vō check karō aur change karō . kaun[pn.;d.] ­ sā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] x hōnā[pres.sg.23] vah[pn.;d.] check karnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] aur change karnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] . who ­ x x be[pres.sg.23] that check do[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] and change do[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

156Check which faith you are weak in and then change it.

96सिर्फ चेक नहीं करना . sirph check nahī̃ karnā . sirph[adj.] check nahī̃[neg] karnā[inf.m.sg.d.] . only check not do[inf.m.sg.d.] .

157Do not just check yourself.

97बापदादा ने कहा था ना चेकर के साथ मेकर भी हो . bāpdādā nē kahā thā nā checker kē sāth maker bhī hō . bāpdādā nē[postp.] kahnā[past-perf.m.sg.] nā checker kē sāth[x] maker bhī[p.] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] . BapDada ∅ say[past-perf.m.sg.] ∅ x with x too (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) .

158BapDada had told you that together with being a checker, you are also a maker.

98सिर्फ चेकर नहीं . sirph checker nahī̃ . sirph[adj.] checker nahī̃[neg] . only x not .

159You are not just a checker.

99चेक करने का अर्थ ही है सेकण्ड में चेंज होना . check karnē kā arth|earth hī hai second mē̃ change hōnā . check karnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] arth[n.m.;sg.,d.]|earth hī[p.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] second mē̃[postp.] change hōnā[inf.m.sg.d.] . check do[inf.m.pl.,o.] of (meaning|earth) only be[pres.sg.23] second in change be[inf.m.sg.d.] .

160To check means to be able to change yourself in one second.

100लेकिन चेक करो और चेंज नहीं करो तो बहुत काल से स्वयं में दिलशिकस्त के संस्कार पक्के होते जायेंगे और जो बहुतकाल के संस्कार हैं वही अन्त में अवश्य सामना करते रहेंगे . lēkin check karō aur change nahī̃ karō tō bahut kāl sē svayã mē̃ dilśhikasta kē|K saṅskār pakkē hōtē jāyēṅgē aur jō bahutkāl kē|K saṅskār haĩ vahī ant mē̃ avaśhya sāmnā kartē rahē̃gē . lēkin check karnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] aur change nahī̃[neg] karnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] tō bahut kal sē[postp.] svayã mē̃[postp.] dilśhikast[adj.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K saṅskār[x] pakkā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] hōnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3.pres-part+jānā] aur jō[pn.;d.] bahutkāl kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K saṅskār[x] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] vahī ant[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] avaśhya sāmnā karnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3.pres-part+rahnā] . but check do[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] and change not do[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] then very x from x in disheartened (of|K) sanskar firm be[fut.m.pl.12hon3.pres-part+jānā] and that a long period of time (of|K) sanskar be[pres.pl.12hon3] this end in x face[fut.m.pl.12hon3.pres-part+rahnā] .

161If you check yourself and do not change yourself, what would happen? 162Over a long period of time the sanskars of being disheartened would become very strong. 163And the sanskars of a long period of time will come to oppose you at the end.

101कोई सोचे अन्त में तो मैं सिवाए बाप के और कुछ नहीं सोचूँगा . kōī sōchē ant mē̃ tō maĩ sivāē bāp kē|K aur kuchh nahī̃ sōchū̃gā . kōī[pn.;d.] sōchnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|sōchnā[opt.sg.23] ant[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] tō maĩ[pn.sg.d.] sivāē bāp[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K aur kuchh[x] nahī̃[neg] sōchnā[fut.m.sg.1] . some (think[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|think[opt.sg.23]) end in then I except father (of|K) x not think[fut.m.sg.1] .

164Some may think: No, I will only remember Baba and think of nothing else at the end.

102लेकिन हो नहीं सकता . lēkin hō nahī̃ saktā . lēkin hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] nahī̃[neg] saknā[pres-part.m.sg.d.] . but (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) not can[pres-part.m.sg.d.] .

165However, this is not possible.

103बहुतकाल का अभ्यास चाहिये . bahutkāl kā abhyās chāhiyē . bahutkāl kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] abhyās[n.m.;sg.,d.] chāhiē . a long period of time of practice should .

166You need to practise over a long period of time.

104नहीं तो एक सेकण्ड सोचेंगे-शिवबाबा शिवबाबा शिवबाबा … और दूसरे सेकण्ड माया कहेगी-नहीं , तुम्हारे में शक्ति नहीं है , तुम हो ही कमज़ोर , तो युद्ध चलती रहेगी . nahī̃ tō ēk second sōcēṅgē-śivabābā śhivbābā śhivbābā … aur dūsrē second māyā kahēgī-nahī̃ , tumhārē mē̃ śhakti nahī̃ hai , tum hō hī kamzōr , tō yuddha chaltī rahēgī . nahī̃ tō[x] ēk[adj.] second x śhivbābā śhivbābā … aur dūsrā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] second māyā[n.f.;sg.] x , tum[pn.pl.kē] mē̃[postp.] śhakti[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] nahī̃[neg] hōnā[pres.sg.23] , tum[pn.pl.] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] hī[p.] kamjōr[adj.] , tō yuddh[n.m.;sg.,d.] chalnā[fut.f.sg.23.pres-part+rahnā] . otherwise one second x Shiv Baba Shiv Baba … and other second Maya x , you[.kē] in Shakti not be[pres.sg.23] , you (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) only weak , then battle continue[fut.f.sg.23.pres-part+rahnā] .

167Otherwise, one second, you will think: Shiv Baba, Shiv Baba, Shiv Baba, and then the next second, Maya will say: No, you do not have any power, you are weak. 168Then there will be a battle taking place.

105यदि निश्चिन्त नहीं होंगे तो ब्राह्मण जीवन के अन्तकाल का जो लक्ष्य वर्णन करते हो वो सहज कैसे होगा और अगर अन्त तक ये व्यर्थ संकल्प होंगे तो वही भूतों के , यमदूतों के रूप में आयेंगे . yadi niśhchinta nahī̃ hōṅgē tō brāhmaṇ jīvan kē|K antkāl kā jō lakṣhya varṇan kartē hō vō sahaj kaisē hōgā aur agar ant tak yē vyarth saṅkalp hōṅgē tō vahī bhūtō̃ kē|K , yamadūtō̃ kē|K rūp mē̃ āyēṅgē . yadi niśhchint[x] nahī̃[neg] hōnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] tō brāhmaṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.] jīvan[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K antkāl[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] jō[pn.;d.] lakṣhya[adj.] varṇan[n.m.;sg.,d.] karnā[pres.pl.m.2] vah[pn.;d.] sahaj[adj.] kaisā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] hōnā[fut.m.sg.23] aur agar ant[n.m.;sg.,d.] tak yah[pn.pl.d.] vyarth[n.m.;sg.,d.] saṅkalp[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] tō vahī bhūt[n.m.+ō̃;pl.o.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K , x kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K rūp[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] ānā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] . x without worry not be[fut.m.pl.12hon3] then Brahmin life (of|K) final moments of that aim x do[pres.pl.m.2] that easy how be[fut.m.sg.23] and if end until this wasteful thought be[fut.m.pl.12hon3] then this evil spirit (of|K) , x (of|K) Rup in come[fut.m.pl.12hon3] .

169You know what the aim of Brahmin life is, of what your final moments should be like, do you not? 170Only when you are carefree will the final moments that you speak of be easy. 171Otherwise, wasteful thoughts will come to you in the form of evil spirits and demons of death.

106और कोई यमदूत नहीं आते हैं , ये व्यर्थ संकल्प अपनी कमज़ोरियाँ , यही यमदूत के रूप में आते हैं . aur kōī yamadūt nahī̃ ātē haĩ , yē vyarth saṅkalp apnī kamazōriyā̃ , yahī yamadūt kē|K rūp mē̃ ātē haĩ . aur kōī[x] yamadūt[n.m.;sg.,d.] nahī̃[neg] ānā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] , yah[pn.pl.d.] vyarth[n.m.;sg.,d.] saṅkalp[n.m.;sg.,d.] apnā[pn.ā=>ī;f.] x , yahī[pn.;d.] yamadūt[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K rūp[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] ānā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] . someone else x not come[pres.pl.m.12hon3] , this wasteful thought one’s own x , this x (of|K) Rup in come[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

172No other demons of death come, but these wasteful thoughts and your own weaknesses come in the form of demons of death.

107यमदूत क्या करते हैं  ? yamadūt kyā kartē haĩ  ? yamadūt[n.m.;sg.,d.] kyā karnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3]  ? x what do[pres.pl.m.12hon3]  ?

173What do demons of death do?

108डराते हैं . ḍarātē haĩ . ḍarānā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] . x[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

174They eat you.

109और दूसरों के लिये कहेंगे विमान में जायेंगे अर्थात् उड़ती कला से पार हो जायेंगे . aur dūsrō̃ kē|K liyē kahē̃gē vimān mē̃ jāyēṅgē arthāt uṛtī kalā sē pār hō jāyēṅgē . aur dūsrā[n.m.+ō̃;pl.o.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K lēnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.] kahnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] vimān[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] jānā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] arthāt uṛnā[pres-part.f.] kalā[n.f.;sg.] sē[postp.] pār[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3.root+jānā] . and other (of|K) take[past-part.m.pl.,o.] say[fut.m.pl.12hon3] x in go[fut.m.pl.12hon3] that is fly[pres-part.f.] degree from across be[fut.m.pl.12hon3.root+jānā] .

175They scare you. 176And for others you say that they will go in the flying vehicles, that is, they will go across with the flying stage.

110कोई विमान आदि नहीं हैं लेकिन उड़ती कला का अनुभव है . kōī vimān ādi nahī̃ haĩ lēkin uṛtī kalā kā anubhav hai . kōī[pn.;d.] vimān[n.m.;sg.,d.] ādi[adj.] nahī̃[neg] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] lēkin uṛnā[pres-part.f.] kalā[n.f.;sg.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] anubhav[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] . some x etc. not be[pres.pl.12hon3] but fly[pres-part.f.] degree of experience be[pres.sg.23] .

177There is no flying vehicle etc., but they have the experience of the flying stage. 178So what do you have to do?

111इसलिये पहले से ही चेक करके चेंज करो . isliyē pahlē sē hī check karkē change karō . isliē pahlē sē[x] hī[p.] check karnā[abs.] change karnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] . therefore beforehand only check do[abs.] change do[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

179Will you check and change yourself in advance or will you just check yourself?

112कब तक करेंगे  ? kab tak karē̃gē  ? kab tak karnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3]  ? when until do[fut.m.pl.12hon3]  ?

180Will you do both?

113बापदादा को खुश तो कर देते हैं-करेंगे , प्रतिज्ञा भी लिख देते हैं लेकिन वो कागज तक रहती हैं या जीवन तक  ? bāpdādā kō khuśh tō kar dētē haĩ-karēṅgē , pratigyā bhī likh dētē haĩ lēkin vō kāgaj tak rahtī haĩ yā jīvan tak  ? bāpdādā kō[postp.] khuśh[adj.] tō karnā[root] dēnā[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] x , pratigyā[n.f.;sg.] bhī[p.] likhnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3.root+dēnā] lēkin vah[pn.;d.] kāġaz[n.m.;sg.,d.] tak rahnā[pres.pl.f.12hon3] yā jīvan[n.m.;sg.,d.] tak  ? BapDada to happy then do[root] give[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] x , x too write[pres.pl.m.12hon3.root+dēnā] but that paper until remain[pres.pl.f.12hon3] or life until  ? 114अच्छा - आज मधुबन निवासियों का भी टर्न है . achchhā - āj madhuban nivāsiyō̃ kā bhī turn hai . achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] - āj madhuban[n.m.;sg.,d.] nivāsī[n.m.+ō̃;pl.o.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] bhī[p.] tum hōnā[pres.sg.23] . achcha - today Madhuban resident of too you be[pres.sg.23] .

181When will you do this? 182You please BapDada by saying that you will do it. 183Even now, Madhuban niwasis have written a promise; so is that just on paper or is it in your practical life?

115मधुबन वालों से तो विशेष बापदादा का स्नेह है . madhuban vālō̃ sē tō viśhēṣh bāpdādā kā snēh hai . madhuban[n.m.;sg.,d.] vālā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] sē[postp.] tō viśhēṣh[adj.] bāpdādā kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] snēh[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] . Madhuban those who from then special BapDada of love be[pres.sg.23] .

184Today, it is their turn. 185BapDada has special love for the Madhuban niwasis.

116सबसे है लेकिन फिर भी थोड़ा ­ सा विशेष मधुबन निवासियों से है क्योंकि निमित्त हैं . sabsē hai lēkin phir bhī thōṛā ­ sā viśhēṣh madhuban nivāsiyō̃ sē hai kyōṅki nimitt haĩ . sabsē hōnā[pres.sg.23] lēkin phir bhī[x] thōṛā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] ­ sā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] viśhēṣh[adj.] madhuban[n.m.;sg.,d.] nivāsī[n.m.+ō̃;pl.o.] sē[postp.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] kyōṅki nimitt[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] . the most be[pres.sg.23] but nevertheless short ­ x special Madhuban resident from be[pres.sg.23] because instrument be[pres.pl.12hon3] .

186Baba has love for everyone, but even then, Baba has special love for the Madhuban niwasis because they are the instruments.

117फिर भी देखो आप आते हैं , खातिरी तो ठीक करते हैं ना . phir bhī dēkhō āp ātē haĩ , khātirī tō ṭhīk kartē haĩ nā . phir bhī[x] dēkhnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] āp[pn.pl.] ānā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] , ḵẖātirī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] tō ṭhīk[adj.] karnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] nā . nevertheless see[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] you come[pres.pl.m.12hon3] , hospitality then OK do[pres.pl.m.12hon3] ∅ .

187Look, when you come, they (Madhuban niwasis) look after you very well, do they not?

118मधुबन वाले खातिरी करने में पास हैं ना . madhuban vālē khātirī karnē mē̃ pās|pass haĩ nā . madhuban[n.m.;sg.,d.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] ḵẖātirī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] karnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] mē̃[postp.] pās|pass hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] nā . Madhuban those who hospitality do[inf.m.pl.,o.] in (x|pass) be[pres.pl.12hon3] ∅ .

188They have passed in offering hospitality to everyone, have they not?

119मेहमानय्निवाजी करना ही महानता है . mēhamānaynivājī karnā hī mahāntā hai . x karnā[inf.m.sg.d.] hī[p.] mahāntā[n.f.;sg.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] . x do[inf.m.sg.d.] only x be[pres.sg.23] .

189To offer hospitality to guests is their greatness.

120जिसको मेहमानय्निवाजी करना आता है , वोमहान हो ही जाता है . jiskō mēhamānaynivājī karnā ātā hai , vōmahān hō hī jātā hai . jō[pn.sg.kō] x karnā[inf.m.sg.d.] ānā[pres.sg.m.23] , x hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] hī[p.] jānā[pres.sg.m.23] . that[.kō] x do[inf.m.sg.d.] come[pres.sg.m.23] , x (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) only go[pres.sg.m.23] .

190Those who know how to offer hospitality to guests and look after them well automatically become great.

121सिर्फ खाने ­ पीने से नहीं लेकिन दिल के स्नेह की मेहमानय्निवाजी , वो सबसे श्रेष्ठ है . sirph khānē ­ pīnē sē nahī̃ lēkin dil kē|K snēh kī|key mēhamānaynivājī , vō sabsē śhrēṣhṭh hai . sirph[adj.] khānā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.]|khānā[inf.m.pl.,o.] ­ pīnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] sē[postp.] nahī̃[neg] lēkin dil[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K snēh[n.m.;sg.,d.] karnā[past-part.f.]|kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|key x , vah[pn.;d.] sabsē śhrēṣhṭha[adj.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] . only (eat[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.]|eat[inf.m.pl.,o.]) ­ drink[inf.m.pl.,o.] from not but heart (of|K) love (do[past-part.f.]|of|key) x , that the most elevated be[pres.sg.23] .

191Not just in terms of providing food and drink, but the hospitality of love from the heart is the most elevated.

122चाहे पिकनिक कितनी भी वरा लो लेकिन दिल का स्नेह नहीं मिला तो कहेंगे कुछ नहीं मिला . chāhē picnic kitnī bhī varā lō|low lēkin dil kā snēh nahī̃ milā tō kahē̃gē kuchh nahī̃ milā . chāhnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|chāhē|chāhnā[opt.sg.23] picnic kitnā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] bhī[p.] varnā[past-part.m.sg.d.] lēnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2]|low lēkin dil[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] snēh[n.m.;sg.,d.] nahī̃[neg] milānā[root]|milnā[past-part.m.sg.d.] tō kahnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] kuchh nahī̃[neg] milānā[root]|milnā[past-part.m.sg.d.] . (x[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|whether|x[opt.sg.23]) picnic so too x[past-part.m.sg.d.] (take[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2]|low) but heart of love not (x[root]|receive[past-part.m.sg.d.]) then say[fut.m.pl.12hon3] anything not (x[root]|receive[past-part.m.sg.d.]) .

192No matter how many picnics you give them, if they haven't received love from the heart, they will say that they have received nothing.

123तो मधुबन वाले दिल के स्नेह सहित मेहमानय्निवाजी करते हैं . tō madhuban vālē dil kē|K snēh sahit mēhamānaynivājī kartē haĩ . tō madhuban[n.m.;sg.,d.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] dil[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K snēh[n.m.;sg.,d.] sahit x karnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] . then Madhuban those who heart (of|K) love including x do[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

193So, Madhuban niwasis offer hospitality with love from their heart.

124करते हो ना कि कोई नीचे ­ ऊपर करेंगे तो कहेंगे बापदादा ने ऐसे ही कहा  ? kartē hō nā ki kōī nīchē ­ ūpar karē̃gē tō kahē̃gē bāpdādā nē aisē hī kahā  ? karnā[pres.pl.m.2] nā ki[conj.] kōī[pn.;d.] nīchē ­ ūpar karnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] tō kahnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] bāpdādā nē[postp.] aisā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] hī[p.] kahnā[past-part.m.sg.d.]  ? do[pres.pl.m.2] ∅ that some down ­ over do[fut.m.pl.12hon3] then say[fut.m.pl.12hon3] BapDada ∅ such only say[past-part.m.sg.d.]  ?

194They do this, do they not? 195Or will you say, "BapDada said this" when someone creates upheaval?

125ऐसे नहीं करना . aisē nahī̃ karnā . aisē nahī̃[x] karnā[inf.m.sg.d.] . it isn't that do[inf.m.sg.d.] .

196Do not do this.

126स्नेह के सागर के बच्चे हो ना , कब तक स्नेह देंगे  ? snēh kē|K sāgar kē|K bachchē hō nā , kab tak snēh dēgē  ? snēh[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K sāgar[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K bachchā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] nā , kab tak snēh[n.m.;sg.,d.] dēnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3]  ? love (of|K) ocean (of|K) child (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) ∅ , when until love give[fut.m.pl.12hon3]  ? 127नहीं . nahī̃ . nahī̃[neg] . not .

197You are the children of the Ocean of Love. 198You are not the children of an urn of love, are you?

128गागर के बच्चे नहीं , सागर के बच्चे , बेहद . gāgar kē|K bachchē nahī̃ , sāgar kē|K bachchē , bēhad . x kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K bachchā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] nahī̃[neg] , sāgar[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K bachchā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] , bēhad[adj.] . x (of|K) child not , ocean (of|K) child , unlimited .

199You are the children of the Ocean. 200"Until when will we give love?

129सबके पास स्नेह का स्टॉक है ना  ? sabkē pās|pass snēh kā stock hai nā  ? sabkā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] pās|pass snēh[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] stock hōnā[pres.sg.23] nā  ? everyone's (x|pass) love of stock be[pres.sg.23] ∅  ?

201How long do we have to give love for..?" 202No.

130माताओं के पास भी है , कुमारियों के पास भी है , पाण्डवों के पास भी है . mātāō̃ kē pās bhī hai , kumāriyō̃ kē pās bhī hai , pāṇḍavō̃ kē pās bhī hai . mātā[n.f.+ō̃;pl.o.] kē pās[x] bhī[p.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] , kumārī[n.f.ī=>iyō̃;pl.o.] kē pās[x] bhī[p.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] , pāṇḍav[n.m.+ō̃;pl.o.] kē pās[x] bhī[p.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] . mother to too be[pres.sg.23] , kumari to too be[pres.sg.23] , Pandava to too be[pres.sg.23] .

203You are not the children of an urn, you are the children of the Ocean of Love, unlimited. 204Do all of you have a stock of love?

131सागर है या थोड़ा है  ? sāgar hai yā thōṛā hai  ? sāgar[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] yā thōṛā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23]  ? ocean be[pres.sg.23] or short be[pres.sg.23]  ?

205Mothers have this. 206Kumaris have this.

132तो कभी क्रोध तो नहीं करते होंगे ना  ? tō kabhī krōdh tō nahī̃ kartē hōṅgē nā  ? tō kabhī[adv.] krōdh[n.m.;sg.,d.] tō nahī̃[neg] karnā[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] hōnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] nā  ? then ever anger then not do[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] be[fut.m.pl.12hon3] ∅  ?

207The Pandavs also have this. 208Do you have an ocean or only a little?

133जब स्नेह के सागर हैं तो क्रोध कहाँ से आया  ? jab snēh kē|K sāgar haĩ tō krōdh kahā̃ sē āyā  ? jab snēh[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K sāgar[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] tō krōdh[n.m.;sg.,d.] kahā̃ sē[postp.] ānā[past-part.m.sg.d.]  ? when love (of|K) ocean be[pres.pl.12hon3] then anger where from come[past-part.m.sg.d.]  ?

209Do you have an ocean­full? 210Achcha. 211So you do not ever get angry, do you?

134किसके संस्कारों को जानकर सेटिस्फाय करते हो ना . kiskē saṅskārō̃ kō jānkar satisfy kartē hō nā . kaun[pn.sg.kē] saṅskār[x] kō[postp.] jānnā[abs.] satisfy karnā[pres.pl.m.2] nā . who[.kē] sanskar to know[abs.] satisfy do[pres.pl.m.2] ∅ .

212When you are the oceans of love, where does anger come from?

135चाहे वो रांग है लेकिन आप तो नॉलेजफुल हो ना , आप तो जानते हो ना कि ये क्या है लेकिन उस समय क्या कहते हैं-इसने ऐसे किया ना , इसीलिये हमने भी किया . chāhē vō wrong hai lēkin āp tō knowledgeful hō nā , āp tō jāntē hō nā ki yē kyā hai lēkin us samay kyā kahtē haĩ-isanē aisē kiyā nā , isīliyē hamnē bhī kiyā . chāhnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|chāhē|chāhnā[opt.sg.23] vah[pn.;d.] wrong hōnā[pres.sg.23] lēkin āp[pn.pl.] tō knowledgeful hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] nā , āp[pn.pl.] tō jānnā[pres.pl.m.2] nā ki[conj.] yah[pn.pl.d.] kyā hōnā[pres.sg.23] lēkin vah[pn.sg.o.] samay[n.m.;sg.,d.] kyā kahnā[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] x aisā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] karnā[past-part.m.sg.d.] nā , isliē ham[pn.pl.nē] bhī[p.] karnā[past-part.m.sg.d.] . (x[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|whether|x[opt.sg.23]) that x be[pres.sg.23] but you then knowledgeful (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) ∅ , you then know[pres.pl.m.2] ∅ that this what be[pres.sg.23] but that time what say[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] x such do[past-part.m.sg.d.] ∅ , therefore we[.nē] too do[past-part.m.sg.d.] .

213When you are not able to satisfy someone, though they might be wrong, you know their sanskars because you are knowledge­full are you not? 214You know what they are like, but what do you say at that time?

136रांग से रांग हो गया तो क्या कमाल की  ? wrong sē wrong hō gayā tō kyā kamāl kī|key  ? wrong sē[postp.] wrong hōnā[past-part.m.sg.d..root+jānā] tō kyā kamāl[n.m.;sg.,d.] karnā[past-part.f.]|kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|key  ? x from x be[past-part.m.sg.d..root+jānā] then what x (do[past-part.f.]|of|key)  ?

215"This one did this and so I also did the same."

137उसने रांग किया और आपने उसका रेसपॉन्ड भी रांग ही दिया . usnē wrong kiyā aur āpnē uskā respond bhī wrong hī diyā . vah[pn.sg.nē] wrong karnā[past-part.m.sg.d.] aur āp[pn.pl.nē] vah[pn.sg.kā] respond bhī[p.] wrong hī[p.] dēnā[past-part.m.sg.d.] . that[.nē] x do[past-part.m.sg.d.] and you[.nē] that[.kā] response too x only give[past-part.m.sg.d.] .

216You did something wrong when someone else did something wrong, so what wonder did you perform?

138कई कहते हैं ना क्रोध एक बारी करते हैं तो कुछ नहीं होता , बार ­ बार करता रहता है  ! kaī kahtē haĩ nā krōdh ēk bārī kartē haĩ tō kuchh nahī̃ hōtā , bār ­ bār kartā rahtā hai  ! kaī kahnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] nā krōdh[n.m.;sg.,d.] ēk[adj.] bārī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] karnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] tō kuchh nahī̃[neg] hōnā[pres-part.m.sg.d.] , bār[n.f.;sg.] ­ bār[n.f.;sg.] karnā[pres.sg.m.23.pres-part+rahnā]  ! some say[pres.pl.m.12hon3] ∅ anger one x do[pres.pl.m.12hon3] then anything not be[pres-part.m.sg.d.] , time ­ time do[pres.sg.m.23.pres-part+rahnā]  ! 139तो जानते हो कि जिसका स्वभाव ही क्रोध का है तो वो क्रोध नहीं करेगा तो क्या करेगा  ? tō jāntē hō ki jiskā svabhāv hī krōdh kā hai tō vō krōdh nahī̃ karēgā tō kyā karēgā  ? tō jānnā[pres.pl.m.2] ki[conj.] jō[pn.sg.kā] svabhāv[n.m.;sg.,d.] hī[p.] krōdh[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] tō vah[pn.;d.] krōdh[n.m.;sg.,d.] nahī̃[neg] karnā[fut.m.sg.23] tō kyā karnā[fut.m.sg.23]  ? then know[pres.pl.m.2] that that[.kā] nature only anger of be[pres.sg.23] then that anger not do[fut.m.sg.23] then what do[fut.m.sg.23]  ?

217That one did something wrong and you gave a wrong response. 218Many say that it does not matter if someone becomes angry once, but that he becomes angry again and again! 219So, you know that that one has an angry nature; what else would he do if he did not become angry?

140उसका काम है क्रोध करना और आपका काम है स्नेह देना या क्रोध करना  ? uskā kām hai krōdh karnā aur āpkā kām hai snēh dēnā yā krōdh karnā  ? vah[pn.sg.kā] kām[n.m.;sg.,d.]|kām[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] krōdh[n.m.;sg.,d.] karnā[inf.m.sg.d.] aur āp[pn.pl.kā] kām[n.m.;sg.,d.]|kām[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] snēh[n.m.;sg.,d.] dēnā[inf.m.sg.d.] yā krōdh[n.m.;sg.,d.] karnā[inf.m.sg.d.]  ? that[.kā] (task|lust) be[pres.sg.23] anger do[inf.m.sg.d.] and you[.kā] (task|lust) be[pres.sg.23] love give[inf.m.sg.d.] or anger do[inf.m.sg.d.]  ?

220His task to become angry and what is your task? 221To give love or to become angry once?

141वो 10 बारी करे तो आप एक बारी तो जवाब देंगे ना  ? vō 10 bārī karē tō āp ēk bārī tō javāb dēgē nā  ? vah[pn.;d.] 10 bārī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] karnā[opt.sg.23] tō āp[pn.pl.] ēk[adj.] bārī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] tō javāb[n.m.;sg.,d.] dēnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] nā  ? that 10 x do[opt.sg.23] then you one x then x give[fut.m.pl.12hon3] ∅  ?

222He may become angry ten times, but you would give a response once, would you not?

142नहीं देंगे तो वो 20 बारी करेगा , फिर क्या करेंगे  ? nahī̃ dēgē tō vō 20 bārī karēgā , phir kyā karē̃gē  ? nahī̃[neg] dēnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] tō vah[pn.;d.] 20 bārī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] karnā[fut.m.sg.23] , phirnā[root]|phir[adv.] kyā karnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3]  ? not give[fut.m.pl.12hon3] then that 20 x do[fut.m.sg.23] , (turn[root]|then) what do[fut.m.pl.12hon3]  ?

223Would you not give a response? 224Then he will become angry twenty times.

143तो इतनी सहनशक्ति है या उसने 10 किया , आपने आधा किया कोई हर्जा नहीं  ? tō itnī sahanśhakti hai yā usnē 10 kiyā , āpnē ādhā kiyā kōī harjā nahī̃  ? tō itnā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] sahanśhakti[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] yā vah[pn.sg.nē] 10 karnā[past-part.m.sg.d.] , āp[pn.pl.nē] ādhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] karnā[past-part.m.sg.d.] kōī[pn.;d.] harzā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] nahī̃[neg]  ? then such x be[pres.sg.23] or that[.nē] 10 do[past-part.m.sg.d.] , you[.nē] half do[past-part.m.sg.d.] some x not  ?

225Do you have this much power to tolerate? 226Or, does it not matter when that one becomes angry with you ten times, and you become a little angry?

144उसने झूठ बोला , आपने क्रोध किया , तो क्या ठीक हुआ  ? usnē jhūṭh bōlā , āpnē krōdh kiyā , tō kyā ṭhīk huā  ? vah[pn.sg.nē] jhūṭh[n.m.;sg.,d.] bōlnā[past-part.m.sg.d.] , āp[pn.pl.nē] krōdh[n.m.;sg.,d.] karnā[past-part.m.sg.d.] , tō kyā ṭhīk[adj.] hōnā[past-part.m.sg.d.]  ? that[.nē] of falsehood speak[past-part.m.sg.d.] , you[.nē] anger do[past-part.m.sg.d.] , then what OK be[past-part.m.sg.d.]  ?

227If that one lied and you became angry, that is all right, is it?

145फिर बड़े बहादुरी से कहते हैं-झूठ बोला ना , इसीलिये क्रोध आ गया . phir baṛē bahādurī sē kahtē haĩ-jhūṭh bōlā nā , isīliyē krōdh ā gayā . phirnā[root]|phir[adv.] baṛā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] bahādurī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] sē[postp.] kahnā[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] x bōlnā[past-part.m.sg.d.] nā , isliē krōdh[n.m.;sg.,d.] ānā[past-part.m.sg.d..root+jānā] . (turn[root]|then) very courage from say[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] x speak[past-part.m.sg.d.] ∅ , therefore anger come[past-part.m.sg.d..root+jānā] .

228Then you say with great courage, "Well, you lied and therefore I became angry".

146लेकिन झूठ बोलना तो अच्छा नहीं लगा और क्रोध करना अच्छा है  ! lēkin jhūṭh bōlnā tō achchhā nahī̃ lagā aur krōdh karnā achchhā hai  ! lēkin jhūṭh[n.m.;sg.,d.] bōlnā[inf.m.sg.d.] tō achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] nahī̃[neg] lagānā[root]|lagnā[past-part.m.sg.d.]|lagā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] aur krōdh[n.m.;sg.,d.] karnā[inf.m.sg.d.] achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23]  ! but of falsehood speak[inf.m.sg.d.] then achcha not (attach[root]|x[past-part.m.sg.d.]|x) and anger do[inf.m.sg.d.] achcha be[pres.sg.23]  !

229However, because you did not like the other person telling a lie, you think it is good to become angry.

147तो स्नेह के सागर के मास्टर स्नेह के सागर . tō snēh kē|K sāgar kē|K master snēh kē|K sāgar . tō snēh[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K sāgar[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K master snēh[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K sāgar[n.m.;sg.,d.] . then love (of|K) ocean (of|K) master love (of|K) ocean .

230So, you are the master oceans of love who belong to the Ocean of Love.

148मास्टर स्नेह के सागर के नयन , चैन , वृत्ति , दृष्टि में जरा भी और कोई भाव नहीं आ सकता . master snēh kē|K sāgar kē|K nayan , chain , vr̥itti , dr̥iṣhṭi mē̃ jarā bhī aur kōī bhāv nahī̃ ā saktā . master snēh[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K sāgar[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K nayan, nain[n.m.;sg.,d.] , chain[n.m.;sg.,d.] , vr̥itti[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] , dr̥iṣhṭi[n.f.;sg.] mē̃[postp.] zarā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] bhī[p.] aur kōī[x] bhāv[n.m.;sg.,d.] nahī̃[neg] ānā[root] saknā[pres-part.m.sg.d.] . master love (of|K) ocean (of|K) eye , comfort , attitude , drishti in x too someone else consciousness not come[root] can[pres-part.m.sg.d.] .

231The eyes, features, vision and attitude of one who is a master ocean of love cannot have any other feelings, even the slightest.

149यदि थोड़ा ­ थोड़ा जोश आ गया तो क्या उसको स्नेह का सागर कहेंगे कि लोटा है  ? yadi thōṛā ­ thōṛā jōśh ā gayā tō kyā uskō snēh kā sāgar kahē̃gē ki lōṭā hai  ? yadi thōṛā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] ­ thōṛā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] jōśh[n.m.;sg.,d.] ānā[past-part.m.sg.d..root+jānā] tō kyā vah[pn.sg.kō] snēh[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] sāgar[n.m.;sg.,d.] kahnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] ki[conj.] lōṭā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23]  ? x short ­ short x come[past-part.m.sg.d..root+jānā] then what that[.kō] love of ocean say[fut.m.pl.12hon3] that x be[pres.sg.23]  ?

232Would you call someone who becomes a little forceful an ocean of love? 233Or just an urn?

150चाहे कुछ भी हो जाये , सारी दुनिया क्यों नहीं आप पर क्रोध करे लेकिन मास्टर स्नेह के सागर दुनिया की परवाह नहीं करेंगे . chāhē kuchh bhī hō jāyē , sārī duniyā kyō̃ nahī̃ āp par krōdh karē lēkin master snēh kē|K sāgar duniyā kī|key parvāh nahī̃ karē̃gē . chāhnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|chāhē|chāhnā[opt.sg.23] kuchh bhī[x] hōnā[past-part.m.pl.,o..root+jānā] , sārā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] duniyā[n.f.;sg.] kyō̃ nahī̃[neg] āp[pn.pl.] par[postp.]|par[adj.] krōdh[n.m.;sg.,d.] karnā[opt.sg.23] lēkin master snēh[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K sāgar[n.m.;sg.,d.] duniyā[n.f.;sg.] karnā[past-part.f.]|kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|key parvāh[n.m.;sg.,d.] nahī̃[neg] karnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] . (x[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|whether|x[opt.sg.23]) anything be[past-part.m.pl.,o..root+jānā] , the whole world why not you (at|other) anger do[opt.sg.23] but master love (of|K) ocean world (do[past-part.f.]|of|key) care not do[fut.m.pl.12hon3] .

234No matter what happens, even if the whole world becomes angry with you, one who is a master ocean of love will not be concerned about the world. 235You are carefree emperors.

151बेपरवाह बादशाह हो . bēparvāh bādśhāh hō . bēparvāh[adj.] bādśhāh[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] . x emperor (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) .

236You will not be concerned about anything else.

152जो परवाह थी वो पा लिया . jō parvāh thī vō pā liyā . jō[pn.;d.] parvāh[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[past.f] vah[pn.;d.] pānā[past-part.m.sg.d..root+lēnā] . that care be[past.f] that x[past-part.m.sg.d..root+lēnā] .

237You attained whatever you were concerned about.

153अभी इन व्यर्थ बातों से बेपरवाह बादशाह . abhī in vyarth bātō̃ sē bēparvāh bādśhāh . ab[adv.hī] yah[pn.pl.o.]|in vyarth[n.m.;sg.,d.] bāt[n.f.+ō̃;pl.o.] sē[postp.] bēparvāh[adj.] bādśhāh[n.m.;sg.,d.] . now (this|in) wasteful matter from x emperor .

238You attained it, did you not? 239Now, you are carefree emperors of these wasteful things.

154चेकिंग की परवाह करो , चेंज होने की परवाह करो , लेकिन व्यर्थ में बेपरवाह . checking kī|key parvāh karō , change hōnē kī|key parvāh karō , lēkin vyarth mē̃ bēparvāh . checking karnā[past-part.f.]|kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|key parvāh[n.m.;sg.,d.] karnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] , change hōnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] karnā[past-part.f.]|kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|key parvāh[n.m.;sg.,d.] karnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] , lēkin vyarth[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] bēparvāh[adj.] . x (do[past-part.f.]|of|key) care do[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] , change be[inf.m.pl.,o.] (do[past-part.f.]|of|key) care do[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] , but wasteful in x .

240Be concerned about checking yourselves, be concerned about changing yourselves, but now become carefree of the wasteful.

155कर सकते हो कि बच्चा , पोत्रा , धोत्रा , धोत्री … थोड़ा ­ सा क्रोध करेगा , थोड़ा ­ सा नीचे ­ ऊपर करेगा , तो स्नेह के बजाय और भावना भी आ जायेगी  ? kar saktē hō ki bachchā , pōtrā , dhōtrā , dhōtrī … thōṛā ­ sā krōdh karēgā , thōṛā ­ sā nīchē ­ ūpar karēgā , tō snēh kē|K bajāy aur bhāvnā bhī ā jāyēgī  ? karnā[pres.pl.m.2.root+saknā] ki[conj.] bachchā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] , pōtrā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] , dhōtrā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] , x … thōṛā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] ­ sā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] krōdh[n.m.;sg.,d.] karnā[fut.m.sg.23] , thōṛā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] ­ sā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] nīchē ­ ūpar karnā[fut.m.sg.23] , tō snēh[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K bajāē aur bhāvnā[n.f.;sg.] bhī[p.] ānā[fut.f.sg.23.root+jānā]  ? do[pres.pl.m.2.root+saknā] that child , grandson , grandchildren , x … short ­ x anger do[fut.m.sg.23] , short ­ x down ­ over do[fut.m.sg.23] , then love (of|K) x and feeling too come[fut.f.sg.23.root+jānā]  ?

241Can you do this, or when you return home will there be other feelings instead of love when your children or grandchildren or great­grandchildren become a little angry or create upheaval?

156दफतर में जायेंगे , बिजनेस में जायेंगे , नौकर ऐसा मिल जायेगा , वायुमण्डल ऐसा मिल जायेगा … लेकिन व्यर्थ से बेपरवाह बादशाह . daphatar mē̃ jāyēṅgē , business mē̃ jāyēṅgē , naukar aisā mil jāyēgā , vāyumaṇḍal aisā mil jāyēgā … lēkin vyarth sē bēparvāh bādśhāh . x mē̃[postp.] jānā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] , business mē̃[postp.] jānā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] , naukar[n.m.;sg.,d.] aisā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] milnā[fut.m.sg.23.root+jānā] , vāyumaṇḍal[n.m.;sg.,d.] aisā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] milnā[fut.m.sg.23.root+jānā] … lēkin vyarth[n.m.;sg.,d.] sē[postp.] bēparvāh[adj.] bādśhāh[n.m.;sg.,d.] . x in go[fut.m.pl.12hon3] , business in go[fut.m.pl.12hon3] , x such receive[fut.m.sg.23.root+jānā] , atmosphere such receive[fut.m.sg.23.root+jānā] … but wasteful from x emperor .

242When you go to work or to business, when you have such a servant, when you have such an atmosphere, you must still remain carefree emperors of the wasteful. 243Do not be carefree in terms of the powerful.

157समर्थ में बेपरवाह नहीं होना . samarth mē̃ bēparvāh nahī̃ hōnā . samarth[adj.] mē̃[postp.] bēparvāh[adj.] nahī̃[neg] hōnā[inf.m.sg.d.] . powerful in x not be[inf.m.sg.d.] .

244Be a carefree emperor of the wasteful.

158कई उल्टा भी उठा लेते हैं , जहाँ मर्यादा होगी वहाँ कहेंगे बापदादा ने कहा ना कि बेपरवाह बादशाह बन जाओ . kaī ulṭā bhī uṭhā lētē haĩ , jahā̃ maryādā hōgī vahā̃ kahē̃gē bāpdādā nē kahā nā ki bēparvāh bādśhāh ban jāō . kaī ulṭā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] bhī[p.] uṭhānā[pres.pl.m.12hon3.root+lēnā] , jahā̃ maryādā[n.f.;sg.] hōnā[fut.f.sg.23] vahā̃ kahnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] bāpdādā nē[postp.] kahnā[past-part.m.sg.d.] nā ki[conj.] bēparvāh[adj.] bādśhāh[n.m.;sg.,d.] bannā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2.root+jānā] . some upside down too uplift[pres.pl.m.12hon3.root+lēnā] , where there code of conduct be[fut.f.sg.23] there say[fut.m.pl.12hon3] BapDada ∅ say[past-part.m.sg.d.] ∅ that x emperor become[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2.root+jānā] .

245Some take it wrongly when it comes to the code of conduct; they say: BapDada has said: Become a carefree emperor. 246However, do not become carefree in the code of conduct.

159लेकिन मर्यादाओं में बेपरवाह नहीं . lēkin maryādāō̃ mē̃ bēparvāh nahī̃ . lēkin maryādā[n.f.+ō̃;pl.o.] mē̃[postp.] bēparvāh[adj.] nahī̃[neg] . but code of conduct in x not . 160आपका टाइटल है मर्यादा पुरूषोत्तम . āpkā title hai maryādā purūṣhōttam . āp[pn.pl.kā] title hōnā[pres.sg.23] maryādā[n.f.;sg.] purūṣhōttam[n.m.;sg.,d.] . you[.kā] title be[pres.sg.23] code of conduct the most elevated humans .

247What is your title? 248Those who are the most elevated beings through following the most elevated code of conduct.

161ये मर्यादायें ही ब्राह्मण जीवन के कदम हैं . yē maryādāyē̃ hī brāhmaṇ jīvan kē|K kadam haĩ . yah[pn.pl.d.] maryādā[n.f.+ē̃;pl.d.] hī[p.] brāhmaṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.] jīvan[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K kadam[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] . this code of conduct only Brahmin life (of|K) step be[pres.pl.12hon3] .

249These codes of conduct are the steps of Brahmin life.

162अगर कदम पर कदम नहीं रखा तो मंज़िल कैसे मिलेगी  ? agar kadam par kadam nahī̃ rakhā tō mañzil kaisē milēgī  ? agar kadam[n.m.;sg.,d.] par[postp.]|par[adj.] kadam[n.m.;sg.,d.] nahī̃[neg] rakhnā[past-part.m.sg.d.]|rakhānā[root] tō mañzil[n.f.;sg.] kaisā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] milnā[fut.f.sg.23]  ? if step (at|other) step not (keep[past-part.m.sg.d.]|x[root]) then destination how receive[fut.f.sg.23]  ?

250If you do not place your steps in the footsteps, how would you reach your destination?

163ब्रह्मा बाप के कदम पर कदम रखो . brahmā bāp kē|K kadam par kadam rakhō . brahmā[n.m.;sg.,d.] bāp[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K kadam[n.m.;sg.,d.] par[postp.]|par[adj.] kadam[n.m.;sg.,d.] rakhnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] . Brahma father (of|K) step (at|other) step keep[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

251Place your steps in father Brahma's footsteps.

164तो ये मर्यादायें ही कदम हैं . tō yē maryādāyē̃ hī kadam haĩ . tō yah[pn.pl.d.] maryādā[n.f.+ē̃;pl.d.] hī[p.] kadam[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] . then this code of conduct only step be[pres.pl.12hon3] .

252These maryadas are the footsteps.

165अगर इस कदम में थोड़ा भी नीचे ­ ऊपर होते हो तो मंज़िल से दूर हो जाते हो और फिर मेहनत करनी पड़ती है . agar is kadam mē̃ thōṛā bhī nīchē ­ ūpar hōtē hō tō mañzil sē dūr hō jātē hō aur phir mēhnat karnī paṛtī hai . agar yah[pn.sg.o.] kadam[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] thōṛā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] bhī[p.] nīchē ­ ūpar hōnā[pres.pl.m.2] tō mañzil[n.f.;sg.] sē dūr[x] hōnā[pres.pl.m.2.root+jānā] aur phirnā[root]|phir[adv.] mēhnat[n.f.;sg.] karnā[pres.sg.f.23.oblig2] . if this step in short too down ­ over be[pres.pl.m.2] then destination distant from be[pres.pl.m.2.root+jānā] and (turn[root]|then) effort do[pres.sg.f.23.oblig2] .

253If you move away from following these steps even slightly, then you become distant from your destination and you then have to make effort.

166और बापदादा को बच्चों की मेहनत अच्छी नहीं लगती , कहते हैं सहज योगी और करते हैं मेहनत . aur bāpdādā kō bachchō̃ kī|key mēhnat achchhī nahī̃ lagtī , kahtē haĩ sahaj yōgī aur kartē haĩ mēhnat . aur bāpdādā kō[postp.] bachchā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] karnā[past-part.f.]|kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|key mēhnat[n.f.;sg.] achchhā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] nahī̃[neg] lagnā[pres-part.f.] , kahnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] sahaj[adj.] yōgī[x] aur karnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] mēhnat[n.f.;sg.] . and BapDada to child (do[past-part.f.]|of|key) effort achcha not x[pres-part.f.] , say[pres.pl.m.12hon3] easy yogi and do[pres.pl.m.12hon3] effort .

254And BapDada does not like to see the children making effort. 255You call yourselves easy yogis and yet you labour!

167तो अच्छा लगता है क्या  ? tō achchhā lagtā hai kyā  ? tō achchhā lagnā[pres.sg.m.23] kyā  ? then enjoy what  ?

256So, do you like this? 257Are all of you all right?

168अच्छा . achchhā . achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] . achcha . 169 ( बापदादा ने ड्रिल कराई ) एवररेडी हो  ? ( bāpdādā nē drill karāī ) ever ready hō  ? ( bāpdādā nē[postp.] drill karānā[past-part.f.] ) ever ready hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2]  ? ( BapDada ∅ drill make commit[past-part.f.] ) ever-ready (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2])  ?

258You are sitting in a corner and so you think that BapDada has not seen you.

170अभी ­ अभी बापदादा कहें सब इकट्ठेचलो तो चल पड़ेंगे  ? abhī ­ abhī bāpdādā kahē̃ sab ikaṭṭhēcalō tō chal paṛē̃gē  ? ab[adv.hī] ­ ab[adv.hī] bāpdādā kahnā[opt.pl.12hon3] sab[adj.] x tō chalnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3.root+paṛnā]  ? now ­ now BapDada say[opt.pl.12hon3] all x then continue[fut.m.pl.12hon3.root+paṛnā]  ?

259At least you are sitting warmly wrapped even in the cold. 260It feels good, does it not?

171कि सोचेंगे कि फोन करें , टेलीग्राम करें कि हम जा रहे हैं  ? ki sōchē̃gē ki phone karē̃ , telegram karē̃ ki ham jā rahē haĩ  ? ki[conj.] sōchnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] ki[conj.] phone karnā[opt.pl.12hon3] , telegram karnā[opt.pl.12hon3] ki[conj.] ham[pn.pl.] jānā[pres.pl.m.prog.12hon3]  ? that think[fut.m.pl.12hon3] that x do[opt.pl.12hon3] , x do[opt.pl.12hon3] that we go[pres.pl.m.prog.12hon3]  ?

261(BapDada performed drill.)Are you ever­ready? 262If BapDada were to tell you now to go, would you go?

172टेलीफोन के ऊपर लाइन नहीं लगेगी  ? telephone kē ūpar line nahī̃ lagēgī  ? telephone kē ūpar[x] line nahī̃[neg] lagnā[fut.f.sg.23]  ? x over line not x[fut.f.sg.23]  ?

263Or would you think: Let me make a phone call that I am going. 264Let me send a telegram.

173आपके घर वाले सोचेंगे कहाँ गये फिर  ? āpkē ghar vālē sōchē̃gē kahā̃ gayē phir  ? āp[pn.pl.kē] ghar[n.m.;sg.,d.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] sōchnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] kahā̃ jānā[past-part.m.pl.,o.] phirnā[root]|phir[adv.]  ? you[.kē] home those who think[fut.m.pl.12hon3] where go[past-part.m.pl.,o.] (turn[root]|then)  ?

265No? 266What if you do not get the line over the telephone?

174सेकण्ड में आत्मा चल पड़ी-है तो अच्छा ना कि याद आयेगा कि अभी तो एक सब्जेक्ट में कमज़ोर हूँ  ? second mē̃ ātmā chal paṛī-hai tō achchhā nā ki yād āyēgā ki abhī tō ēk subject mē̃ kamzōr hū̃  ? second mē̃[postp.] ātmā[n.f.;sg.] chalnā[root] x tō achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] nā ki[conj.] yād[n.f.;sg.] ānā[fut.m.sg.23] ki[conj.] ab[adv.hī] tō ēk[adj.] subject mē̃[postp.] kamjōr[adj.] hōnā[pres.sg.1]  ? second in soul continue[root] x then achcha ∅ that remembrance come[fut.m.sg.23] that now then one subject in weak be[pres.sg.1]  ?

267Then the people at your home will wonder where you have gone. 268But it is good. 269The soul just flies within one second. 270Or will you remember that you are weak in a particular subject?

175अच्छा , यह याद आयेगा कि चीजों को सिर्फ ठिकाने लगाकर आऊं  ? achchhā , yah yād āyēgā ki chījō̃ kō sirph ṭhikānē lagākar āū̃  ? achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] , yah[pn.sg.d.] yād[n.f.;sg.] ānā[fut.m.sg.23] ki[conj.] chīz[n.f.+ō̃;pl.o.] kō[postp.] sirph[adj.] ṭhikānā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] lagānā[abs.] ānā[opt.sg.1]  ? achcha , this remembrance come[fut.m.sg.23] that thing to only destination attach[abs.] come[opt.sg.1]  ?

271Will you remember that you have to place all your things in their place and then go?

176सिर्फ इतल्ला करके आऊं कि हम जा रहे हैं  ? sirph itallā karkē āū̃ ki ham jā rahē haĩ  ? sirph[adj.] x karnā[abs.] ānā[opt.sg.1] ki[conj.] ham[pn.pl.] jānā[pres.pl.m.prog.12hon3]  ? only x do[abs.] come[opt.sg.1] that we go[pres.pl.m.prog.12hon3]  ?

272Will you not think: Let me just inform them that I am going?

177यह सोच थोड़ा ­ थोड़ा चलेगा  ? yah sōch thōṛā ­ thōṛā chalēgā  ? yah[pn.sg.d.] sōchnā[root] thōṛā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] ­ thōṛā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] chalnā[fut.m.sg.23]  ? this think[root] short ­ short continue[fut.m.sg.23]  ?

273Will you have a little thought to just inform them?

178नहीं . nahī̃ . nahī̃[neg] . not .

274No.

179सभी बंधनमुक्त बनेंगे . sabhī bandhanmukt banē̃gē . sab[adv.hī] bandhanmukt[adj.] bannā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] . all free from bondage become[fut.m.pl.12hon3] .

275All of you will become free from bondage.

180अभी से चेक करो कि कोई सोने का , चांदी का धागा तो नहीं है  ? abhī sē check karō ki kōī sōnē kā , chāndī kā dhāgā tō nahī̃ hai  ? ab[adv.hī] sē[postp.] check karnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] ki[conj.] kōī[pn.;d.] sōnā[inf.m.pl.,o.]|sōnā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] , chāndī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] dhāgā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] tō nahī̃[neg] hōnā[pres.sg.23]  ? now from check do[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] that some (sleep[inf.m.pl.,o.]|gold) of , silver of thread then not be[pres.sg.23]  ?

276This is why check from now that there are still no golden or silver strings remaining.

181लोहा मोटा होता है तो दिखाई देता है लेकिन ये सोना और चांदी आकर्षितकर लेता है . lōhā mōṭā hōtā hai tō dikhāī dētā hai lēkin yē sōnā aur chāndī ākarṣitakar lētā hai . lōhā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] mōṭā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.m.23] tō dikhāī dēnā[pres.sg.m.23] lēkin yah[pn.pl.d.] sōnā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.]|sōnā[inf.m.sg.d.] aur chāndī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] x lēnā[pres.sg.m.23] . iron gross be[pres.sg.m.23] then be visible but this (gold|sleep[inf.m.sg.d.]) and silver x take[pres.sg.m.23] .

277Iron is gross and so it is visible, but gold and silver attract you. 278To be ever­ready means you go as soon as you receive an order.

182एवररेडी का अर्थ ही है ऑर्डर हुआ और चल पड़ा . ever ready kā arth|earth hī hai order huā aur chal paṛā . ever ready kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] arth[n.m.;sg.,d.]|earth hī[p.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] order hōnā[past-part.m.sg.d.] aur chalnā[past-part.m.sg.d..root+paṛnā] . ever-ready of (meaning|earth) only be[pres.sg.23] order be[past-part.m.sg.d.] and continue[past-part.m.sg.d..root+paṛnā] .

279Are you free from the consciousness of "mine" to this extent?

183इतना मेरेपन से मुक्त हो  ? itnā mērēpan sē mukt hō  ? itnā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] mērēpan[n.m.;sg.,d.] sē[postp.] mukt[adj.] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2]  ? such x from free (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2])  ? 184सबसे बड़ा मेरापन सुनाया ना कि देहभान के साथ देह ­ अभिमान के सोने ­ चांदी के धागे बहुत हैं . sabsē baṛā mērāpan sunāyā nā ki dēhbhān kē sāth dēh ­ abhimān kē|K sōnē ­ chāndī kē|K dhāgē bahut haĩ . sabsē baṛā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] mērēpan[n.m.;sg.,d.] sunānā[past-part.m.sg.d.] nā ki[conj.] dēhbhān[n.m.;sg.,d.] kē sāth[x] dēh[n.f.;sg.] ­ abhimān[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K sōnā[inf.m.pl.,o.]|sōnā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] ­ chāndī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K dhāgā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] bahut hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] . the most very x speak[past-part.m.sg.d.] ∅ that body consciousness with body ­ arrogance (of|K) (sleep[inf.m.pl.,o.]|gold) ­ silver (of|K) thread very be[pres.pl.12hon3] .

280You have already been told that, together with body consciousness, the greatest consciousness of "mine", is that there are many golden and silver strings of the arrogance of the self.

185इसलिये सूक्ष्म बुद्धि से , महीन बुद्धि से चेक करो कि कोई भी अल्पकाल का नशा ये धागा बन करके रोकने के निमित्त तो नहीं बनेगा  ? isliyē sūkṣhma buddhi sē , mahīn buddhi sē check karō ki kōī bhī alpkāl kā naśhā yē dhāgā ban karkē rōknē kē nimitt tō nahī̃ banēgā  ? isliē sūkṣhma[adj.] buddhi[n.f.;sg.] sē[postp.] , mahīn[adj.] buddhi[n.f.;sg.] sē[postp.] check karnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] ki[conj.] kōī bhī[x] alpkāl[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] naśhā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] yah[pn.pl.d.] dhāgā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] ban[n.m.;sg.,d.]|bannā[root] karnā[abs.] rōknā[inf.m.pl.,o.] kē nimitt[x] tō nahī̃[neg] bannā[fut.m.sg.23]  ? therefore subtle intellect from , refined intellect from check do[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] that anyone temporary period of intoxication this thread (x|become[root]) do[abs.] x[inf.m.pl.,o.] x then not become[fut.m.sg.23]  ? 186मोटी बुद्धि से नहीं सोचना कि मेरा कुछ नहीं है , कुछ नहीं है . mōṭī buddhi sē nahī̃ sōchnā ki mērā kuchh nahī̃ hai , kuchh nahī̃ hai . mōṭā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] buddhi[n.f.;sg.] sē[postp.] nahī̃[neg] sōchnā[inf.m.sg.d.] ki[conj.] maĩ[pn.sg.kā] kuchh nahī̃[neg] hōnā[pres.sg.23] , kuchh nahī̃[neg] hōnā[pres.sg.23] . gross intellect from not think[inf.m.sg.d.] that I[.kā] anything not be[pres.sg.23] , anything not be[pres.sg.23] .

281Therefore, check with a subtle intellect, not with a gross intellect thinking that nothing belongs to you, nothing belongs to you, but with a subtle and refined intellect, check that no type of temporary intoxication is a cord that becomes instrumental in holding you back.

187फॉलोकरने में सदा ब्रह्मा बाप को फॉलो करो . phôlōkaranē mē̃ sadā brahmā bāp kō follow karō . x mē̃[postp.] sadā brahmā[n.m.;sg.,d.] bāp[n.m.;sg.,d.] kō[postp.] follow karnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] . x in constantly Brahma father to follow do[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

282In terms of following, constantly follow father Brahma.

188सर्व प्रति गुणग्राहक बनना अलग चीज़है लेकिन फॉलो फादर . sarv prati guṇgrāhak bannā alag cīzahai lēkin follow father . sarv[adj.] prati guṇgrāhak, guṇgrāhī[adj.] bannā[inf.m.sg.d.] alag[adj.] x lēkin follow father[x] . all for one who pick up virtues become[inf.m.sg.d.] separate x but follow the Father .

283To pick up virtues from everyone is a different thing, but follow the father.

189कई हैं जो भाई ­ बहनों को फॉलो करने लगते हैं लेकिन वो फॉलोकिसको करते हैं  ? kaī haĩ jō bhāī ­ bahanō̃ kō follow karnē lagtē haĩ lēkin vō phôlōkisakō kartē haĩ  ? kaī hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] jō[pn.;d.] bhāī[n.m.;sg.,d.]|bhānā[past-part.f.] ­ bahan ou bahin[n.f.+ō̃;pl.o.] kō[postp.] follow karnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3.inf+lagnā] lēkin vah[pn.;d.] x karnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3]  ? some be[pres.pl.12hon3] that (brother|be liked[past-part.f.]) ­ x to follow do[pres.pl.m.12hon3.inf+lagnā] but that x do[pres.pl.m.12hon3]  ?

284Many think that they have to follow their brothers and sisters, but whom are they following?

190वो फॉलोब्रह्मा बाप को करते हैं और आप फिर उनको करते  ! vō phôlōbrahmā bāp kō kartē haĩ aur āp phir unkō kartē  ! vah[pn.;d.] x bāp[n.m.;sg.,d.] kō[postp.] karnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] aur āp[pn.pl.] phirnā[root]|phir[adv.] vah[pn.pl.kō] karnā[pres-part.m.pl.,o.]  ! that x father to do[pres.pl.m.12hon3] and you (turn[root]|then) that[.kō] do[pres-part.m.pl.,o.]  !

285They are following father Brahma, and you follow them. 286It should not be like this.

191डायरेक्ट क्यों नहीं करते  ? direct kyō̃ nahī̃ kartē  ? direct kyō̃ nahī̃[neg] karnā[pres-part.m.pl.,o.]  ? direct why not do[pres-part.m.pl.,o.]  ?

287Why do you not follow Brahma Baba directly?

192सभी ब्रह्मा कुमार हो ना  ? sabhī brahmā kumār hō nā  ? sab[adv.hī] brahmā[n.m.;sg.,d.] kumār[x] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] nā  ? all Brahma kumar (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) ∅  ?

288All of you are Brahma Kumars, are you not?

193कि फलाने भाई कुमार , फलानी बहन कुमार  ? ki phalānē bhāī kumār , phalānī bahan kumār  ? ki[conj.] phalānā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] bhāī[n.m.;sg.,d.]|bhānā[past-part.f.] kumār[x] , phalānā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] bahan ou bahin[n.f.;sg.] kumār[x]  ? that x (brother|be liked[past-part.f.]) kumar , x x kumar  ?

289Or, are you such­and­such a brother Kumar or such­and­such a sister Kumar? 290It is not like this.

194यह तो नहीं  ? yah tō nahī̃  ? yah[pn.sg.d.] tō nahī̃[neg]  ? this then not  ?

291So who is the father?

195फॉलो फादर गाया हुआ है याफॉलो ब्रदर्स सिस्टर  ? follow father gāyā huā hai yāphôlō brothers sister  ? follow father[x] gānā[past-part.m.sg.d.] hōnā[pres-perf.sg.m.23] x brother sister  ? follow the Father sing[past-part.m.sg.d.] be[pres-perf.sg.m.23] x brother x  ?

292Brahma. 293So, is follow the father remembered or follow the brother or sister remembered?

196विशेषता देखो , लेकिन फॉलोफादर . viśhēṣhtā dēkhō , lēkin phôlōphādar . viśhēṣhtā[n.f.;sg.] dēkhnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] , lēkin x . speciality see[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] , but x .

294You may see their specialities, but follow the father.

197रिगार्ड रखो लेकिन गाइड एक बाप है . regard rakhō lēkin guide ēk bāp hai . regard rakhnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] lēkin guide ēk[adj.] bāp[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] . regard keep[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] but guide one father be[pres.sg.23] .

295Have regard for them but the one Father is the Guide.

198कोई भाई ­ बहन गाइड नहीं बन सकता . kōī bhāī ­ bahan guide nahī̃ ban saktā . kōī[pn.;d.] bhāī[n.m.;sg.,d.]|bhānā[past-part.f.] ­ bahan ou bahin[n.f.;sg.] guide nahī̃[neg] ban[n.m.;sg.,d.]|bannā[root] saknā[pres-part.m.sg.d.] . some (brother|be liked[past-part.f.]) ­ x guide not (x|become[root]) can[pres-part.m.sg.d.] .

296No brother or sister can be the Guide. 297The Guide is only one.

199गाइड एक है . guide ēk hai . guide ēk[adj.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] . guide one be[pres.sg.23] .

298Only God is the Guide.

200गॉड गाइड है और साकार एग्जाम्पल ब्रह्मा बाप है . god guide hai aur sākār example brahmā bāp hai . god guide hōnā[pres.sg.23] aur sākār, sākārī[adj.] example brahmā[n.m.;sg.,d.] bāp[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] . x guide be[pres.sg.23] and sakar example Brahma father be[pres.sg.23] .

299And the sakar example is father Brahma. 300So, do you follow the father or do you think that you have not even seen father Brahma?

201बस . bas . basnā[root]|bas . (x[root]|simply) . 202तोफॉलो फादर करते हो कि सोचते हो कि ब्रह्मा को तो देखा ही नहीं , जाना ही नहीं , तो कैसे फॉलो करें  ? tōphôlō father kartē hō ki sōchtē hō ki brahmā kō tō dēkhā hī nahī̃ , jānā hī nahī̃ , tō kaisē follow karē̃  ? x father karnā[pres.pl.m.2] ki[conj.] sōchnā[pres.pl.m.2] ki[conj.] brahmā[n.m.;sg.,d.] kō[postp.] tō dēkhnā[past-part.m.sg.d.] hī[p.] nahī̃[neg] , jānnā[past-part.m.sg.d.]|jānā[inf.m.sg.d.] hī[p.] nahī̃[neg] , tō kaisā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] follow karnā[opt.pl.12hon3]  ? x father do[pres.pl.m.2] that think[pres.pl.m.2] that Brahma to then see[past-part.m.sg.d.] only not , (know[past-part.m.sg.d.]|go[inf.m.sg.d.]) only not , then how follow do[opt.pl.12hon3]  ?

301We have not seen father Brahma, we do not know him, so how can we follow him? 302To follow means to place your footsteps in his footsteps. 303You know this, do you not?

203जानते नहीं हो , देखा नहीं है  ? jāntē nahī̃ hō , dēkhā nahī̃ hai  ? jānnā[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] nahī̃[neg] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] , dēkhnā[past-part.m.sg.d.] nahī̃[neg] hōnā[pres.sg.23]  ? know[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] not (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) , see[past-part.m.sg.d.] not be[pres.sg.23]  ?

304Or, don't you? 305Do you now know him? 306Have you not seen him?

204टीचर्स को देखा , भाई ­ बहनों को देखा , बाप को देखा ही नहीं-ऐसे तो नहीं सोचते  ? teachers kō dēkhā , bhāī ­ bahanō̃ kō dēkhā , bāp kō dēkhā hī nahī̃-aisē tō nahī̃ sōchtē  ? teacher kō[postp.] dēkhnā[past-part.m.sg.d.] , bhāī[n.m.;sg.,d.]|bhānā[past-part.f.] ­ bahan ou bahin[n.f.+ō̃;pl.o.] kō[postp.] dēkhnā[past-part.m.sg.d.] , bāp[n.m.;sg.,d.] kō[postp.] dēkhnā[past-part.m.sg.d.] hī[p.] x tō nahī̃[neg] sōchnā[pres-part.m.pl.,o.]  ? teacher to see[past-part.m.sg.d.] , (brother|be liked[past-part.f.]) ­ x to see[past-part.m.sg.d.] , father to see[past-part.m.sg.d.] only x then not think[pres-part.m.pl.,o.]  ?

307You do not think that you have seen the teachers, you have seen your brothers and sisters, but that you have not seen the father, do you?

205कोई भी निमित्त हैं लेकिन निमित्त बनाया किसने  ? kōī bhī nimitt haĩ lēkin nimitt banāyā kisnē  ? kōī bhī[x] nimitt[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] lēkin nimitt[n.m.;sg.,d.] banānā[past-part.m.sg.d.] kaun[pn.sg.nē]  ? anyone instrument be[pres.pl.12hon3] but instrument create[past-part.m.sg.d.] who[.nē]  ?

308Anyone may be an instrument, but who made them the instrument?

206अपने आप ही तो निमित्त नहीं बने ना  ? apnē āp hī tō nimitt nahī̃ banē nā  ? apnē āp[x] hī[p.] tō nimitt[n.m.;sg.,d.] nahī̃[neg] bannā[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|bannā[opt.sg.23] nā  ? by yourself only then instrument not (become[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|become[opt.sg.23]) ∅  ?

309They have not become instruments by themselves, have they?

207बाप ने बनाया . bāp nē banāyā . bāp[n.m.;sg.,d.] nē[postp.] banānā[past-part.m.sg.d.] . father ∅ create[past-part.m.sg.d.] .

310The Father has made them the instruments.

208तो फिर बाप याद आयेगा ना  ? tō phir bāp yād āyēgā nā  ? tō phirnā[root]|phir[adv.] bāp[n.m.;sg.,d.] yād[n.f.;sg.] ānā[fut.m.sg.23] nā  ? then (turn[root]|then) father remembrance come[fut.m.sg.23] ∅  ?

311So what is there in­between?

209अच्छा . achchhā . achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] . achcha .

312The Father.

210सभी अच्छी तरह से सेट हो गये हैं . sabhī achchhī tarah sē set hō gayē haĩ . sab[adv.hī] achchhā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] tarah[n.f.;sg.] sē[postp.] set hōnā[pres-perf.pl.m.12hon3.root+jānā] . all achcha x from set be[pres-perf.pl.m.12hon3.root+jānā] .

313Achcha. 314Are all of you settled comfortably?

211सोना ­ खाना ठीक है  ? sōnā ­ khānā ṭhīk hai  ? sōnā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.]|sōnā[inf.m.sg.d.] ­ khānā[inf.m.sg.d.]|khānā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] ṭhīk[adj.] hōnā[pres.sg.23]  ? (gold|sleep[inf.m.sg.d.]) ­ (eat[inf.m.sg.d.]|eat[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.]) OK be[pres.sg.23]  ?

315Is your sleeping and eating all right?

212कि बहुत दूर कोने में भेज दिया है  ? ki bahut dūr kōnē mē̃ bhēj diyā hai  ? ki[conj.] bahut dūr[adj.] kōnā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] mē̃[postp.] bhējnā[pres-perf.sg.m.23.root+dēnā]  ? that very distant corner in x[pres-perf.sg.m.23.root+dēnā]  ?

316It is not that you have been sent off to far­away corners, is it?

213भक्ति मार्ग में तो यात्राओं में कितना पैदल करते हो और आप अगर दूर भी रहते हो तो लेने के लिए बस आती है . bhakti mārg mē̃ tō yātrāō̃ mē̃ kitnā paidal kartē hō aur āp agar dūr bhī rahtē hō tō lēnē kē liē bas ātī hai . bhakti mārg[x] mē̃[postp.] tō yātrā[n.f.+ō̃;pl.o.] mē̃[postp.] kitnā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] paidal karnā[pres.pl.m.2] aur āp[pn.pl.] agar dūr[adj.] bhī[p.] rahnā[pres.pl.m.2] tō lēnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] kē liē[x] basnā[pres.sg.f.23.root+ānā] . path of devotion in then pilgrimage in so by foot do[pres.pl.m.2] and you if distant too remain[pres.pl.m.2] then take[inf.m.pl.,o.] for x[pres.sg.f.23.root+ānā] .

317On the pilgrimages of the path of bhakti, people walk so much, whereas even if you come from far away, the buses come to fetch you, do they not? 318Or do you come walking?

214आराम से आते हो ना  ? ārām sē ātē hō nā  ? ārām[x] sē[postp.] ānā[pres.pl.m.2] nā  ? comfort from come[pres.pl.m.2] ∅  ?

319You come comfortably, do you not?

215और ब्रह्मा बाप के आगे तो यह कोच ­ कुर्सियाँ भी नहीं थी . aur brahmā bāp kē āgē tō yah kōc ­ kursiyā̃ bhī nahī̃ thī . aur brahmā[n.m.;sg.,d.] bāp[n.m.;sg.,d.] kē āgē[x] tō yah[pn.sg.d.] x ­ x bhī[p.] nahī̃[neg] hōnā[past.f] . and Brahma father in front of then this x ­ x too not be[past.f] .

320And look at yourself now, in the days of Brahma Baba, there were no coaches or chairs.

216अभी तो देखो , कोच और कुर्सियों वाले हो गये . abhī tō dēkhō , kōc aur kursiyō̃ vālē hō gayē . ab[adv.hī] tō dēkhnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] , x aur x vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] hōnā[past-part.m.pl.,o..root+jānā] . now then see[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] , x and x those who be[past-part.m.pl.,o..root+jānā] .

321Now, you have become those who have coaches and chairs.

217कितने आराम से बैठे हो . kitnē ārām sē baiṭhē hō . kitnā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] ārām[x] sē[postp.] baiṭhnā[pres-perf.pl.m.2] . so comfort from sit[pres-perf.pl.m.2] .

322You are sitting so comfortably.

218बापदादा भी जानते हैं कि पुराने शरीर हैं तो पुराने शरीरों को साधन चाहिये . bāpdādā bhī jāntē haĩ ki purānē śharīr haĩ tō purānē śharīrō̃ kō sādhan chāhiyē . bāpdādā bhī[p.] jānnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] ki[conj.] purānā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] śharīr[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] tō purānā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] śharīr[n.m.+ō̃;pl.o.] kō[postp.] sādhan[n.m.;sg.,d.] chāhiē . BapDada too know[pres.pl.m.12hon3] that old body be[pres.pl.12hon3] then old body to facilities should .

323Why? 324BapDada knows that your bodies have become old and so the old bodies also need the facilities.

219लेकिन ऐसा अभ्यास जरूर करो कि कोई भी समय साधन नहीं हो तो साधना में विघ्न नहीं पड़ना चाहिये . lēkin aisā abhyās jarūr karō ki kōī bhī samay sādhan nahī̃ hō tō sādhnā mē̃ vighna nahī̃ paṛnā chāhiyē . lēkin aisā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] abhyās[n.m.;sg.,d.] zarūr karnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] ki[conj.] kōī bhī[x] samay[n.m.;sg.,d.] sādhan[n.m.;sg.,d.] nahī̃[neg] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] tō sādhnā[n.f.;sg.] mē̃[postp.] vighna[n.m.;sg.,d.] nahī̃[neg] paṛnā[.oblig3] . but such practice definitely do[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] that anyone time facilities not (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) then spiritual endeavour in obstacle not fall[.oblig3] .

325However, you now definitely have to have such a practice that whenever you do not have any facilities, it would not create an obstacle in your spiritual endeavour.

220जो मिला वो अच्छा . jō milā vō achchhā . jō[pn.;d.] milānā[root]|milnā[past-part.m.sg.d.] vah[pn.;d.] achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] . that (x[root]|receive[past-part.m.sg.d.]) that achcha .

326Whatever you get is good.

221अगर कुर्सा मिली तो भी अच्छा , धरनी मिली तो भी अच्छा . agar kursā milī tō bhī achchhā , dharnī milī tō bhī achchhā . agar x milnā[past-part.f.] tō bhī[x] achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] , dharnā[inf.f.]|dharnī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] milnā[past-part.f.] tō bhī[x] achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] . if x receive[past-part.f.] ∅ achcha , (adopt[inf.f.]|earth) receive[past-part.f.] ∅ achcha .

327If you get a chair, that is good and if you get the floor, that is also good.

222सब आराम से रहे हुए हो कि खटिया चाहिये  ? sab ārām sē rahē huē hō ki khaṭiyā chāhiyē  ? sab[adj.] ārām[x] sē[postp.] rahnā[opt.sg.23]|rahnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.] hōnā[pres-perf.pl.m.2] ki[conj.] khaṭiyā[n.f.;sg.] chāhiē  ? all comfort from (remain[opt.sg.23]|remain[past-part.m.pl.,o.]) be[pres-perf.pl.m.2] that x should  ?

328Are all of you living comfortably? 329Or does anyone have any difficulty?

223घरों में तो खटिया पर सोते हो ना , यहाँ भी खटिया मिली तो क्या बात हुई  ! gharō̃ mē̃ tō khaṭiyā par sōtē hō nā , yahā̃ bhī khaṭiyā milī tō kyā bāt huī  ! ghar[n.m.+ō̃;pl.o.] mē̃[postp.] tō khaṭiyā[n.f.;sg.] par[postp.]|par[adj.] sōnā[pres.pl.m.2] nā , yahā̃ bhī[p.] khaṭiyā[n.f.;sg.] milnā[past-part.f.] tō kyā bāt[n.f.;sg.] hōnā[past-part.f.]  ! home in then x (at|other) sleep[pres.pl.m.2] ∅ , here too x receive[past-part.f.] then what matter be[past-part.f.]  !

330The Pandavs are courageous. 331Are the mothers all right? 332Or do you need your bed? 333At home, you sleep on your bed.

224चेंज चाहिये ना . change chāhiyē nā . change chāhiē nā . change should ∅ .

334If you get beds here also, then what does it matter?

225चेंज के लिये कितना खर्चा करके जाते हैं . change kē|K liyē kitnā kharchā karkē jātē haĩ . change kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K lēnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.] kitnā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] kharch, kharchā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] karnā[abs.] jānā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] . change (of|K) take[past-part.m.pl.,o.] so expenditure do[abs.] go[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

335People need change. 336They spend so much just to get some change.

226वहाँ खटिया पर सोते हो , यहाँ पट पर सोते हो , चेंज हो गई ना . vahā̃ khaṭiyā par sōtē hō , yahā̃ paṭ par sōtē hō , change hō gaī nā . vahā̃ khaṭiyā[n.f.;sg.] par[postp.]|par[adj.] sōnā[pres.pl.m.2] , yahā̃ paṭ[adj.] par[postp.]|par[adj.] sōnā[pres.pl.m.2] , change hōnā[past-part.f..root+jānā] nā . there x (at|other) sleep[pres.pl.m.2] , here x (at|other) sleep[pres.pl.m.2] , change be[past-part.f..root+jānā] ∅ .

337There, you sleep on beds and here you sleep on the floor and so that is a change, is it not?

227ये तो सुना दिया कि जितना साधन बढ़ायेंगे उतनी संख्या डबल , ट्रिबल बढ़ेगी . yē tō sunā diyā ki jitnā sādhan baṛhāyēṅgē utnī saṅkhyā double , triple baṛhēgī . yah[pn.pl.d.] tō sunnā[past-part.m.sg.d..past-part+dēnā]|sunānā[past-part.m.sg.d..root+dēnā] ki[conj.] jitnā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] sādhan[n.m.;sg.,d.] baṛhānā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] utnā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] saṅkhyā[n.f.;sg.] double , triple baṛhnā[fut.f.sg.23] . this then (listen[past-part.m.sg.d..past-part+dēnā]|speak[past-part.m.sg.d..root+dēnā]) that the more facilities increase[fut.m.pl.12hon3] x x double , triple grow[fut.f.sg.23] .

338You have already been told that however much you increase the facilities, the numbers will double or triple themselves.

228तो ये तो चलना ही है . tō yē tō chalnā hī hai . tō yah[pn.pl.d.] tō chalnā[inf.m.sg.d.] hī[p.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] . then this then continue[inf.m.sg.d.] only be[pres.sg.23] .

339This will continue all the time.

229अभी ज्ञान सरोवर बना रहे हैं फिर दूसरे वर्ष कहेंगे ज्ञान सरोवर छोटा हो गया . abhī gyān sarōvar banā rahē haĩ phir dūsrē varṣh kahē̃gē gyān sarōvar chhōṭā hō gayā . ab[adv.hī] gyān sarōvar[x] banānā[pres.pl.m.prog.12hon3] phirnā[root]|phir[adv.] dūsrā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] varṣh[n.m.;sg.,d.] kahnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] gyān sarōvar[x] chhōṭā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[past-part.m.sg.d..root+jānā] . now Gyan Sarovar create[pres.pl.m.prog.12hon3] (turn[root]|then) other year say[fut.m.pl.12hon3] Gyan Sarovar small be[past-part.m.sg.d..root+jānā] .

340At present, you are constructing Gyan Sarovar and then, next year, you will say that it has become small.

230ये तो होना ही है . yē tō hōnā hī hai . yah[pn.pl.d.] tō hōnā[inf.m.sg.d.] hī[p.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] . this then be[inf.m.sg.d.] only be[pres.sg.23] .

341It has to become small.

231क्योंकि सेवा को समाप्त भी करना है या चलते रहना है  ? kyōṅki sēvā kō samāpt bhī karnā hai yā chaltē rahnā hai  ? kyōṅki sēvā[n.f.;sg.] kō[postp.] samāpt[adj.] bhī[p.] karnā[pres.sg.23.oblig1] yā chalnā[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] rahnā[pres.sg.23.oblig1]  ? because service to finished too do[pres.sg.23.oblig1] or continue[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] remain[pres.sg.23.oblig1]  ?

342You also have to complete the service or do you just wish to continue?

232सम्पन्न करके समाप्त करना है . sampann karkē samāpt karnā hai . sampann[adj.] karnā[abs.] samāpt karnā[pres.sg.23.oblig1] . full do[abs.] x .

343You have to complete it and finish it.

233तो सम्पन्न तब होगी जब कम से कम 9 लाख की माला बनाओ . tō sampann tab hōgī jab kam sē kam 9 lākh kī|key mālā banāō . tō sampann[adj.] tab hōnā[fut.f.sg.23] jab kam sē kam[x] 9 lākh[x] karnā[past-part.f.]|kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|key mālā[n.f.;sg.] banānā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] . then full for only then be[fut.f.sg.23] when at least 9 100,000 (do[past-part.f.]|of|key) garland create[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

344It will be completed when a rosary of at least 900,000 is created.

234अच्छा . achchhā . achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] . achcha .

345Achcha.

235पंजाब , हरियाणा , हिमाचल ­ अच्छा , ये कितनी माला लायेंगे  ? pañjāb , hariyāṇā , himācal ­ achchhā , yē kitnī mālā lāyēṅgē  ? pañjāb[n.m.;sg.,d.] , hariyāṇā , x ­ achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] , yah[pn.pl.d.] kitnā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] mālā[n.f.;sg.] lānā[fut.m.pl.12hon3]  ? Punjab , x , x ­ achcha , this so garland x[fut.m.pl.12hon3]  ?

346Punjab, Hariyana and Himachal: Achcha, how much of the rosary will you prepare? 347How much of the rosary will you prepare?

236लाख , दो , तीन , कितनी  ? lākh , dō , tīn , kitnī  ? lākh[x] , dō[adj.]|dēnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] , tīn[adj.] , kitnā[adj.ā=>ī;f.]  ? 100,000 , (two|give[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2]) , x , so  ?

348Yes, speak! 349Do not remain quiet.

237 ( 4 लाख ) 4 लाख लायेंगे  ! ( 4 lākh ) 4 lākh lāyēṅgē  ! ( 4 lākh[x] ) 4 lākh[x] lānā[fut.m.pl.12hon3]  ! ( 4 100,000 ) 4 100,000 x[fut.m.pl.12hon3]  !

350How much of the rosary will you bring?

238फिर तो अच्छा है , और जोन मौज मनाये और पंजाब माला बनाये . phir tō achchhā hai , aur zone mauj manāyē aur pañjāb mālā banāyē . phirnā[root]|phir[adv.] tō achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] , aur zone mauj[n.f.;sg.] manānā[past-part.m.pl.,o.] aur pañjāb[n.m.;sg.,d.] mālā[n.f.;sg.] banānā[past-part.m.pl.,o.] . (turn[root]|then) then achcha be[pres.sg.23] , and zone pleasure celebrate[past-part.m.pl.,o.] and Punjab garland create[past-part.m.pl.,o.] .

351One hundred thousand, two hundred thousand or three hundred thousand? 352(Four hundred thousand).

239अच्छा , ऐसा कौन ­ सा जोन है जो अभी 50 हजार तक पहुँचा हो  ? achchhā , aisā kaun ­ sā zone hai jō abhī 50 hajār tak pahuñchā hō  ? achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] , aisā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] kaun[pn.;d.] ­ sā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] zone hōnā[pres.sg.23] jō[pn.;d.] ab[adv.hī] 50 hazār[n.m.;sg.,d.] tak pahuñchnā[x]  ? achcha , such who ­ x zone be[pres.sg.23] that now 50 1000 until reach[x]  ?

353Then it is good. 354All the other zones will enjoy themselves and Punjab will create the rosary.

240कोई भी जोन में 50 हजार नहीं हैं . kōī bhī zone mē̃ 50 hajār nahī̃ haĩ . kōī bhī[x] zone mē̃[postp.] 50 hazār[n.m.;sg.,d.] nahī̃[neg] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] . anyone zone in 50 1000 not be[pres.pl.12hon3] .

355Achcha, which zone has already prepared 50,000 Brahmins?

241तो कम से कम हर जोन 50 हजार तो बनाये . tō kam sē kam har|her zone 50 hajār tō banāyē . tō kam sē kam[x] har|harnā[root]|her zone 50 hazār[n.m.;sg.,d.] tō banānā[past-part.m.pl.,o.] . then at least (x|x[root]) zone 50 1000 then create[past-part.m.pl.,o.] .

356Not a single zone has 50,000 yet. 357How many are there in Maharashtra?

242पंजाब की संख्या कितनी है  ? pañjāb kī|key saṅkhyā kitnī hai  ? pañjāb[n.m.;sg.,d.] karnā[past-part.f.]|kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|key saṅkhyā[n.f.;sg.] kitnā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] hōnā[pres.sg.23]  ? Punjab (do[past-part.f.]|of|key) x so be[pres.sg.23]  ?

358Even if there are 35 to 40 thousand, you still have to prepare 10,000 more.

243 ( 12 हजार ) अच्छी बात है , 4 लाख का लक्ष्य रखा है . ( 12 hajār ) achchhī bāt hai , 4 lākh kā lakṣhya rakhā hai . ( 12 hazār[n.m.;sg.,d.] ) achchhā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] bāt[n.f.;sg.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] , 4 lākh[x] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] lakṣhya[adj.] rakhnā[pres-perf.sg.m.23] . ( 12 1000 ) achcha matter be[pres.sg.23] , 4 100,000 of aim keep[pres-perf.sg.m.23] .

359So, each zone should prepare at least 50,000. How many are there in Punjab? 360(12,000).

244पंजाब , हरियाणा , हिमाचल और जम्मू कश्मीर 4 तो हैं , तो चार एक ­ एक लाख बनाये तो क्या बड़ी बात है . pañjāb , hariyāṇā , himācal aur jammū kaśhmīr 4 tō haĩ , tō chār ēk ­ ēk lākh banāyē tō kyā baṛī bāt hai . pañjāb[n.m.;sg.,d.] , hariyāṇā , x aur x kaśhmīr[n.m.;sg.,d.] 4 tō hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] , tō chār[adj.] ēk[adj.] ­ ēk[adj.] lākh[x] banānā[past-part.m.pl.,o.] tō kyā baṛā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] bāt[n.f.;sg.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] . Punjab , x , x and x Kashmir 4 then be[pres.pl.12hon3] , then four one ­ one 100,000 create[past-part.m.pl.,o.] then what very matter be[pres.sg.23] . 245लेकिन कब तक बनायेंगे  ? lēkin kab tak banāyēṅgē  ? lēkin kab tak banānā[fut.m.pl.12hon3]  ? but when until create[fut.m.pl.12hon3]  ? 246सतयुग के आदि तक या अभी  ? satyug kē|K ādi tak yā abhī  ? satyug[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K ādi[adj.] tak yā ab[adv.hī]  ? golden age (of|K) etc. until or now  ?

361So, Punjab has not yet even reached 50,000. It is good that you have kept the aim of reaching four hundred thousand. 362So there are four: Punjab, Hariyana, Himachal and Jammu Kashmir and so it is nothing difficult if each one prepares one hundred thousand.

247पंजाब वाले समीपता को समीप लाने वाले हैं . pañjāb vālē samīpatā kō samīp lānē vālē haĩ . pañjāb[n.m.;sg.,d.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] samīpatā[n.f.;sg.] kō[postp.] samīp[adj.] lānā[inf.m.pl.,o.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] . Punjab those who closeness to close x[inf.m.pl.,o.] those who be[pres.pl.12hon3] .

363But when will you prepare them? 364By the beginning of the golden age or now?

248सम्पूर्णता समीपता का आधार है . sampūrṇtā samīpatā kā ādhār hai . sampūrṇtā[n.f.;sg.] samīpatā[n.f.;sg.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] ādhār[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] . perfection closeness of basis be[pres.sg.23] .

365Those from Punjab will bring closeness very close.

249तो पंजाब की विशेषता है स्वयं को सम्पूर्ण बनाये अन्तिम समय को समीप लाने वाले . tō pañjāb kī|key viśhēṣhtā hai svayã kō sampūrṇ banāyē antim samay kō samīp lānē vālē . tō pañjāb[n.m.;sg.,d.] karnā[past-part.f.]|kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|key viśhēṣhtā[n.f.;sg.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] svayã kō[postp.] sampūrṇ[adj.] banānā[past-part.m.pl.,o.] antim[adj.] samay[n.m.;sg.,d.] kō[postp.] samīp[adj.] lānā[inf.m.pl.,o.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] . then Punjab (do[past-part.f.]|of|key) speciality be[pres.sg.23] x to complete create[past-part.m.pl.,o.] final time to close x[inf.m.pl.,o.] those who .

366Perfection is the basis of closeness. 367The speciality of Punjab is to make themselves complete and to bring the final time close.

250हिम्मत है  ? himmat hai  ? himmat[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23]  ? courage be[pres.sg.23]  ?

368Do you have this courage?

251जितना जितना स्वयं को सम्पन्न बनाते जायेंगे उतना सम्पूर्णता और समीपता नजदीक आ जायेगी . jitnā jitnā svayã kō sampann banātē jāyēṅgē utnā sampūrṇtā aur samīpatā najdīk ā jāyēgī . jitnā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] jitnā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] svayã kō[postp.] sampann[adj.] banānā[fut.m.pl.12hon3.pres-part+jānā] utnā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] sampūrṇtā[n.f.;sg.] aur samīpatā[n.f.;sg.] nazdīk ānā[fut.f.sg.23.root+jānā] . the more the more x to full create[fut.m.pl.12hon3.pres-part+jānā] x perfection and closeness x come[fut.f.sg.23.root+jānā] .

369Those from Punjab, raise your hands. 370The more complete you make yourselves, the closer perfection and closeness will come to you.

252तो सदा समीप रहने वाले और सदा समय को समीप लाने वाले . tō sadā samīp rahnē vālē aur sadā samay kō samīp lānē vālē . tō sadā samīp[adj.] rahnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] aur sadā samay[n.m.;sg.,d.] kō[postp.] samīp[adj.] lānā[inf.m.pl.,o.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] . then constantly close remain[inf.m.pl.,o.] those who and constantly time to close x[inf.m.pl.,o.] those who .

371So, you are those who constantly remain close and those who bring the time close. 372Achcha.

253देखो , पंजाब वालों ने एक विजय तो प्राप्त कर ली , वायुमण्डल को परिवर्तन कर लिया . dēkhō , pañjāb vālō̃ nē ēk vijay tō prāpt kar lī , vāyumaṇḍal kō parivartan kar liyā . dēkhnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] , pañjāb[n.m.;sg.,d.] vālā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] nē[postp.] ēk[adj.] vijay[n.m.;sg.,d.] tō prāpt karnā[past-part.f..root+lēnā] , vāyumaṇḍal[n.m.;sg.,d.] kō[postp.] parivartan[n.m.;sg.,d.] karnā[past-part.m.sg.d..root+lēnā] . see[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] , Punjab those who ∅ one victory then reach , atmosphere to transformation do[past-part.m.sg.d..root+lēnā] .

373Teachers speak: Ha ji or na ji?Look, those from Punjab have attained victory in one thing. 374You have transformed the atmosphere.

254आतंकवादियों का वायुमण्डल तो बदला अभी अंत लाने में भी इतने बहादुर बनो . ātaṅkavādiyō̃ kā vāyumaṇḍal tō badlā|badalā abhī ant lānē mē̃ bhī itnē bahādur banō . x kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] vāyumaṇḍal[n.m.;sg.,d.] tō badlānā[root]|badlā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.]|badalnā[past-part.m.sg.d.] ab[adv.hī] ant[n.m.;sg.,d.] lānā[inf.m.pl.,o.] mē̃[postp.] bhī[p.] itnā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] bahādur[adj.] bannā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] . x of atmosphere then (x[root]|x|change[past-part.m.sg.d.]) now end x[inf.m.pl.,o.] in too such x become[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

375The atmosphere of the terrorists has now changed. 376Therefore, now become just as courageous in bringing about the end.

255पंजाब माना बहादुर . pañjāb mānā bahādur . pañjāb[n.m.;sg.,d.] mānā|mānnā[past-part.m.sg.d.] bahādur[adj.] . Punjab (means|x[past-part.m.sg.d.]) x . 256शरीर में भी , आत्मा में भी . śharīr mē̃ bhī , ātmā mē̃ bhī . śharīr[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] bhī[p.] , ātmā[n.f.;sg.] mē̃[postp.] bhī[p.] . body in too , soul in too .

377All those from Punjab, whether new or old, are all good.

257तो सदा यह याद रखना कि-सम्पूर्णता द्वारा समाप्ति के समय को समीप लाने वाले हैं , समीप रहने वाली श्रेष्ठ आत्मायें हैं . tō sadā yah yād rakhnā ki-sampūrṇatā dvārā samāpti kē samay kō samīp lānē vālē haĩ , samīp rahnē vālī śhrēṣhṭh ātmāyē̃ haĩ . tō sadā yah[pn.sg.d.] yād rakhnā[x] x dvārā samāpti kē samay[x] kō[postp.] samīp[adj.] lānā[inf.m.pl.,o.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] , samīp[adj.] rahnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] vālā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] śhrēṣhṭha[adj.] ātmā[n.f.+ē̃;pl.d.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] . then constantly this remember x through time of completion to close x[inf.m.pl.,o.] those who be[pres.pl.12hon3] , close remain[inf.m.pl.,o.] those who elevated soul be[pres.pl.12hon3] .

378Punjab means courageous; in terms of the body and also in terms of the soul. 379So what will you remember? 380Those who bring the time of completion close through your perfection. 381Constantly remain this.

258जो बाप समान होंगे वो ही समीप रहेंगे . jō bāp samān hōṅgē vō hī samīp rahē̃gē . jō[pn.;d.] bāp samān[x] hōnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] vah[pn.;d.] hī[p.] samīp[adj.] rahnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] . that equal to the Father be[fut.m.pl.12hon3] that only close remain[fut.m.pl.12hon3] .

382You are the elevated souls who remain close. 383Who can remain close?

259तो ऐसे समीप रहने वाली आत्मायें हो . tō aisē samīp rahnē vālī ātmāyē̃ hō . tō aisā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] samīp[adj.] rahnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] vālā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] ātmā[n.f.+ē̃;pl.d.] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] . then such close remain[inf.m.pl.,o.] those who soul (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) .

384Those who are like the Father can remain close to the Father.

260इसी स्मृति के समर्थीसे सदा आगे बढ़ते चलो . isī smr̥iti kē|K samarthīsē sadā āgē baṛhtē chalō . yah[pn.sg.hī] smr̥iti[n.f.;sg.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K x sadā āgē baṛhnā[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] chalnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] . this[.hī] awareness (of|K) x constantly previously grow[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] continue[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

385So you are the souls who remain close in this way. 386With the power of this awareness, constantly continue to move forward.

261समझा  ? samjhā  ? samjhānā[root]|samajhnā[past-part.m.sg.d.]  ? (explain[root]|understand[past-part.m.sg.d.])  ?

387Achcha.

262अच्छा  ! achchhā  ! achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.]  ! achcha  ! 263बाम्बे , नागपुर , पूना , जलगांव ( महाराष्ट्र ) - महाराष्ट्र वाले कितनी माला तैयार करेंगे  ? bāmbē , nāgapur , pūnā , jalagā̃v ( mahārāṣhṭra ) - mahārāṣhṭra vālē kitnī mālā taiyār karē̃gē  ? bāmbē , x , pūnā , x ( mahārāṣhṭra[n.m.;sg.,d.] ) - mahārāṣhṭra[n.m.;sg.,d.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] kitnā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] mālā[n.f.;sg.] taiyār[adj.] karnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3]  ? Bombay , x , x , x ( Maharashtra ) - Maharashtra those who so garland x do[fut.m.pl.12hon3]  ?

388Bombay, Nagpur, Poona (Maharashtra):How much of the rosary will Maharashtra prepare? 389Those from Punjab will prepare four hundred thousand, and this is firm, so do not forget it. 390What will Maharashtra do?

264 ( 5 लाख ) महाराष्ट्र में बाम्बे भी है और बाम्बे को नरदेसावर का टाइटल है तो सिर्फ पैसे में थोड़ेही नरदेसावर होंगे , माला के मणके बनाने में भी नरदेसावर . ( 5 lākh ) mahārāṣhṭra mē̃ bāmbē bhī hai aur bāmbē kō naradēsāvar kā title hai tō sirph paisē mē̃ thōṛēhī naradēsāvar hōṅgē , mālā kē|K maṇakē banānē mē̃ bhī naradēsāvar . ( 5 lākh[x] ) mahārāṣhṭra[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] bāmbē bhī[p.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] aur bāmbē kō[postp.] x kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] title hōnā[pres.sg.23] tō sirph[adj.] paisā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] mē̃[postp.] thōṛēhī x hōnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] , mālā[n.f.;sg.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K maṇkā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] banānā[inf.m.pl.,o.] mē̃[postp.] bhī[p.] x . ( 5 100,000 ) Maharashtra in Bombay too be[pres.sg.23] and Bombay to x of title be[pres.sg.23] then only money in not x be[fut.m.pl.12hon3] , garland (of|K) x create[inf.m.pl.,o.] in too x .

391Five hundred thousand. 392It is good. 393Bombay is also included in Maharashtra and Bombay has already received the title of being "Nar Desavar" (those who are constantly overflowing); so you will not be Nar Desavar only in terms of money, you are Nar Desavar also in terms of preparing the beads of the rosary. 394Is this OK?

265तो महाराष्ट्र पांच लाख बनायेंगे  ! tō mahārāṣhṭra pāñch lākh banāyēṅgē  ! tō mahārāṣhṭra[n.m.;sg.,d.] pañch[adj.] lākh[x] banānā[fut.m.pl.12hon3]  ! then Maharashtra five 100,000 create[fut.m.pl.12hon3]  !

395You will prepare 500,000! 396No one should then think that the 900,000 are already prepared.

266कोई ख्याल नहीं करना कि 9 लाख तो पूरे हो गये  ! kōī khyāl nahī̃ karnā ki 9 lākh tō pūrē hō gayē  ! kōī[pn.;d.] khyāl[n.m.;sg.,d.] nahī̃[neg] karnā[inf.m.sg.d.] ki[conj.] 9 lākh[x] tō pūrā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] hōnā[past-part.m.pl.,o..root+jānā]  ! some thought not do[inf.m.sg.d.] that 9 100,000 then full be[past-part.m.pl.,o..root+jānā]  !

397You will bring 400,000 and Maharashtra will bring 500,000.Then there will also be a selection, will there not?

267पंजाब वाले चार लाख लायेंगे और महाराष्ट्र पांच लाख लायेगा . pañjāb vālē chār lākh lāyēṅgē aur mahārāṣhṭra pāñch lākh lāyēgā . pañjāb[n.m.;sg.,d.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] chār[adj.] lākh[x] lānā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] aur mahārāṣhṭra[n.m.;sg.,d.] pañch[adj.] lākh[x] lānā[fut.m.sg.23] . Punjab those who four 100,000 x[fut.m.pl.12hon3] and Maharashtra five 100,000 x[fut.m.sg.23] . 268फिर छांट छूट भी तो होगी ना  ? phir chhāṇṭ chhūṭ bhī tō hōgī nā  ? phirnā[root]|phir[adv.] chhāṇṭnā[root] chhūṭnā[root] bhī[p.] tō hōnā[fut.f.sg.23] nā  ? (turn[root]|then) select[root] let go[root] too then be[fut.f.sg.23] ∅  ?

398Some will be the subjects of the silver age and some will be the objects of the golden age and therefore, you may create 500,000. And Punjab should remember their 400,000. So the greatness of Maharashtra is to constantly be victorious.

269कोई त्रेता की प्रजा होगी , कोई सतयुग की होगी , इसलिये इतने भले बनाओ . kōī trētā kī|key prajā hōgī , kōī satyug kī|key hōgī , isliyē itnē bhalē banāō . kōī[pn.;d.] trētā[n.f.;sg.] karnā[past-part.f.]|kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|key prajā[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[fut.f.sg.23] , kōī[pn.;d.] satyug[n.m.;sg.,d.] karnā[past-part.f.]|kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|key hōnā[fut.f.sg.23] , isliē itnā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] bhalā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] banānā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] . some silver age (do[past-part.f.]|of|key) x be[fut.f.sg.23] , some golden age (do[past-part.f.]|of|key) be[fut.f.sg.23] , therefore such benefit create[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

399The greatness is in the victory. 400So you are constantly the victorious souls who constantly have a stage that is free from obstacles.

270महाराष्ट्र की महानता अर्थात् सदा विजयी . mahārāṣhṭra kī|key mahāntā arthāt sadā vijayī . mahārāṣhṭra[n.m.;sg.,d.] karnā[past-part.f.]|kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|key mahāntā[n.f.;sg.] arthāt sadā vijayī[adj.] . Maharashtra (do[past-part.f.]|of|key) x that is constantly victorious .

401Just as victory is guaranteed, so too, you are the victorious souls who have faith in the intellect.

271महानता है ही विजय में . mahāntā hai hī vijay mē̃ . mahāntā[n.f.;sg.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] hī[p.] vijay[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] . x be[pres.sg.23] only victory in .

402Are those from Maharashtra like this?

272तो सदा निर्विघ्न स्थिति द्वारा सदा विजयी आत्मायें . tō sadā nirvighna sthiti dvārā sadā vijayī ātmāyē̃ . tō sadā nirvighna[adj.] sthiti[n.f.;sg.] dvārā sadā vijayī[adj.] ātmā[n.f.+ē̃;pl.d.] . then constantly free from obstacles stage through constantly victorious soul . 273विजय निश्चित है ऐसे निश्चय बुद्धि विजयी . vijay niśhchit hai aisē niśhchay buddhi vijayī . vijay[n.m.;sg.,d.] niśhchit[adj.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] aisā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] niśhchay[n.m.;sg.,d.] buddhi[n.f.;sg.] vijayī[adj.] . victory fixed be[pres.sg.23] such faith intellect victorious .

403Or, are you simply saying Han ji whilst you are here and then, when you return home, you will write letters: "What can I do? 404How can I do this?"

274क्योंकि आप विजयी नहीं बनेंगे तो और कौन बनेगा  ? kyōṅki āp vijayī nahī̃ banē̃gē tō aur kaun banēgā  ? kyōṅki āp[pn.pl.] vijayī[adj.] nahī̃[neg] bannā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] tō aur kaun[pn.;d.] bannā[fut.m.sg.23]  ? because you victorious not become[fut.m.pl.12hon3] then and who become[fut.m.sg.23]  ?

405No, you are victorious. 406Because if you don't become victorious, who else would?

275बनना ही है . bannā hī hai . bannā[inf.m.sg.d.] hī[p.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] . become[inf.m.sg.d.] only be[pres.sg.23] .

407You have to become this.

276तो महाराष्ट्र प्रजा भी महानबनायेंगे . tō mahārāṣhṭra prajā bhī mahānabanāyēṅgē . tō mahārāṣhṭra[n.m.;sg.,d.] prajā[n.m.;sg.,d.] bhī[p.] x . then Maharashtra x too x .

408Is this firm? 409Or is it extra firm for those from Maharashtra?

277छोटी ­ मोटी नहीं बनाना . chhōṭī ­ mōṭī nahī̃ banānā . chhōṭā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] ­ mōṭā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] nahī̃[neg] banānā[inf.m.sg.d.] . small ­ gross not create[inf.m.sg.d.] . 278और पंजाब बहादुर बनाना , कमज़ोर नहीं . aur pañjāb bahādur banānā , kamzōr nahī̃ . aur pañjāb[n.m.;sg.,d.] bahādur[adj.] banānā[inf.m.sg.d.] , kamjōr[adj.] nahī̃[neg] . and Punjab x create[inf.m.sg.d.] , weak not .

410The stronger you become in this, the stronger the subjects you prepare will be. 411Otherwise, the subjects will be weak.

279कर्नाटक - अच्छा कर्नाटक वाले कितनी माला बनायेंगे  ? karnāṭak - achchhā karnāṭak vālē kitnī mālā banāyēṅgē  ? karnāṭak[n.m.;sg.,d.] - achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] karnāṭak[n.m.;sg.,d.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] kitnā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] mālā[n.f.;sg.] banānā[fut.m.pl.12hon3]  ? Karnataka - achcha Karnataka those who so garland create[fut.m.pl.12hon3]  ?

412So it is good that Maharashtra will prepare great subjects. 413Do not just make ordinary subjects.

280 ( दो लाख ) अच्छा है , कर्नाटक वालों को स्नेह का जादू बहुत जल्दी लगता है . ( dō lākh ) achchhā hai , karnāṭak vālō̃ kō snēh kā jādū bahut jaldī lagtā hai . ( dō[adj.]|dēnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] lākh[x] ) achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] , karnāṭak[n.m.;sg.,d.] vālā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] kō[postp.] snēh[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] jādū[n.m.;sg.,d.] bahut jaldī lagnā[pres.sg.m.23] . ( (two|give[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2]) 100,000 ) achcha be[pres.sg.23] , Karnataka those who to love of magic very very quickly x[pres.sg.m.23] .

414And, those from Punjab, create courageous subjects, not weak ones. 415Karnataka: Those from Karnataka are in a hurry.

281ज्ञान समझे , नहीं समझे , लेकिन स्नेह में नम्बरवन . gyān samajhē , nahī̃ samajhē , lēkin snēh mē̃ number one . gyān[n.m.;sg.,d.] samajhnā[opt.sg.23]|samajhnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.] , nahī̃[neg] samajhnā[opt.sg.23]|samajhnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.] , lēkin snēh[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] number one . knowledge (understand[opt.sg.23]|understand[past-part.m.pl.,o.]) , not (understand[opt.sg.23]|understand[past-part.m.pl.,o.]) , but love in number one .

416Maybe they want to prepare the rosary and so they are thinking that the rosary should not be completed before them.

282भाषा के कारण ज्ञान समझेंगे आधा , लेकिन स्नेह में नम्बरवन . bhāṣhā kē|K kāraṇ gyān samajhē̃gē ādhā , lēkin snēh mē̃ number one . bhāṣhā[n.f.;sg.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K kāraṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.] gyān[n.m.;sg.,d.] samajhnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] ādhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] , lēkin snēh[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] number one . language (of|K) because knowledge understand[fut.m.pl.12hon3] half , but love in number one .

417Achcha, those from Karnataka speak: how much of the rosary will you prepare? 418(200,000).

283देखो , स्नेह की निशानी है कि सेन्टर बहुत खोलते जाते हैं , सिर्फ एडीशन ये करना कि निर्विघ्न प्रजा बनानी है और निर्विघ्न राजधानी बनानी है . dēkhō , snēh kī|key niśhānī hai ki centre bahut khōltē jātē haĩ , sirph addition yē karnā ki nirvighna prajā banānī hai aur nirvighna rājdhānī banānī hai . dēkhnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] , snēh[n.m.;sg.,d.] karnā[past-part.f.]|kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|key niśhānī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] ki[conj.] centre bahut khōlnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3.pres-part+jānā] , sirph[adj.] addition yah[pn.pl.d.] karnā[inf.m.sg.d.] ki[conj.] nirvighna[adj.] prajā[n.m.;sg.,d.] banānā[pres.sg.23.oblig1] aur nirvighna[adj.] rājdhānī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] banānā[pres.sg.23.oblig1] . see[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] , love (do[past-part.f.]|of|key) sign be[pres.sg.23] that centre very open[pres.pl.m.12hon3.pres-part+jānā] , only addition this do[inf.m.sg.d.] that free from obstacles x create[pres.sg.23.oblig1] and free from obstacles kingdom create[pres.sg.23.oblig1] .

419Achcha, just as you were quick in giving your name, so too, prepare the rosary quickly. 420It is good. 421Those from Karnataka are very quickly spell­bound with the magic of love. 422Whether they understand the knowledge or not, they are number one in love.

284तो कर्नाटक वालों को क्या याद रखना है-निर्विघ्न राज्य अधिकारी और निर्विघ्न साथी बनाना . tō karnāṭak vālō̃ kō kyā yād rakhnā hai-nirvighna rājya adhikārī aur nirvighna sāthī banānā . tō karnāṭak[n.m.;sg.,d.] vālā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] kō[postp.] kyā yād rakhnā[x] x rājya adhikārī[x] aur nirvighna[adj.] sāthī[n.m.;sg.,d.] banānā[inf.m.sg.d.] . then Karnataka those who to what remember x master and free from obstacles companion create[inf.m.sg.d.] .

423Because of their language, they would only understand half the knowledge, but they are number one in love. 424Is it like this? 425You are number one in love. 426The sign of love is that many centre are being opened.

285वृद्धि में बहुत अच्छे हैं लेकिन सिर्फ बैलेन्स रखना-जितना स्नेह उतना ही निर्विघ्न स्थिति . vr̥iddhi mē̃ bahut achchhē haĩ lēkin sirph balance rakhanā-jitanā snēh utnā hī nirvighna sthiti . vr̥iddhi[n.f.;sg.] mē̃[postp.] bahut achchhā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] lēkin sirph[adj.] balance x snēh[n.m.;sg.,d.] utnā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hī[p.] nirvighna[adj.] sthiti[n.f.;sg.] . growth in very achcha be[pres.pl.12hon3] but only balance x love x only free from obstacles stage .

427Now, simply make the addition that you have to create subjects who are free from obstacles and a kingdom that is free from obstacles. 428So, what do those from Karnataka have to remember?

286दोनों के बैलेन्स से सदा स्वतः ही कर्नाटक वालों को ब्लैसिंग मिलती रहेगी . dōnō̃ kē|K balance sē sadā svataḥ hī karnāṭak vālō̃ kō blessing miltī rahēgī . dōnō̃ kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K balance sē[postp.] sadā svataḥ hī[p.] karnāṭak[n.m.;sg.,d.] vālā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] kō[postp.] blessing milnā[fut.f.sg.23.pres-part+rahnā] . x (of|K) balance from constantly automatically only Karnataka those who to blessing receive[fut.f.sg.23.pres-part+rahnā] .

429You are those who have a right to the kingdom that is free from obstacles and you have to create companions who are free from obstacles. 430You are very good in your expansion.

287तो कर्नाटक वाले अण्डर ­ लाइन करना-निर्विघ्न वृद्धि . tō karnāṭak vālē aṇḍar ­ line karanā-nirvighna vr̥iddhi . tō karnāṭak[n.m.;sg.,d.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] x ­ line x vr̥iddhi[n.f.;sg.] . then Karnataka those who x ­ line x growth .

431So what will you remember? 432That you are the loving souls who are free from obstacles.

288अच्छा . achchhā . achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] . achcha .

433Simply maintain a balance.

289गुजरात - गुजरात के ऊपर बापदादा का , दादियों का अधिकार बहुत है . gujarāt - gujarāt kē ūpar bāpdādā kā , dādiyō̃ kā adhikār bahut hai . gujarāt - gujarāt kē ūpar[x] bāpdādā kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] , dādī[n.f.ī=>iyō̃;pl.o.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] adhikār[x] bahut hōnā[pres.sg.23] . Gujarat - Gujarat over BapDada of , Dadi of right very be[pres.sg.23] .

434You become free from obstacles, but your stage should be free from obstacles to the same extent that you have love.

290कोई भी काम पड़ता है तो गुजरात पर अधिकार रखते हैं . kōī bhī kām paṛtā hai tō gujarāt par adhikār rakhtē haĩ . kōī bhī[x] kām[n.m.;sg.,d.]|kām[n.m.;sg.,d.] paṛnā[pres.sg.m.23] tō gujarāt par[postp.]|par[adj.] adhikār[x] rakhnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] . anyone (task|lust) fall[pres.sg.m.23] then Gujarat (at|other) right keep[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

435Those from Karnataka will constantly continue to receive blessings by keeping a balance of both these.

291तो गुजरात की विशेषता क्या हुई  ? tō gujarāt kī|key viśhēṣhtā kyā huī  ? tō gujarāt karnā[past-part.f.]|kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|key viśhēṣhtā[n.f.;sg.] kyā hōnā[past-part.f.]  ? then Gujarat (do[past-part.f.]|of|key) speciality what be[past-part.f.]  ?

436Did those from Karnataka understand? 437Have you underlined this?

292सेवा में भी अधिकारी . sēvā mē̃ bhī adhikārī . sēvā[n.f.;sg.] mē̃[postp.] bhī[p.] adhikārī[n.m.;sg.,d.] . service in too (one) who has a right .

438Let your expansion be free from obstacles. 439Achcha.

293जो सेवा में अधिकारी हैं वो राज्य में तो अधिकारी बनेंगे ही . jō sēvā mē̃ adhikārī haĩ vō rājya mē̃ tō adhikārī banē̃gē hī . jō[pn.;d.] sēvā[n.f.;sg.] mē̃[postp.] adhikārī[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] vah[pn.;d.] rājya[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] tō adhikārī[n.m.;sg.,d.] bannā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] hī[p.] . that service in (one) who has a right be[pres.pl.12hon3] that kingdom in then (one) who has a right become[fut.m.pl.12hon3] only .

440Gujarat:BapDada and the Dadis have many rights over Gujarat. 441You have this, do you not?

294देखो , सेवा में हाँ जी , हाँ जी करते हैं तो राज्य में क्या होगा  ? dēkhō , sēvā mē̃ hā̃ jī , hā̃ jī kartē haĩ tō rājya mē̃ kyā hōgā  ? dēkhnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] , sēvā[n.f.;sg.] mē̃[postp.] hā̃ jī[x] , hā̃ jī[x] karnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] tō rājya[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] kyā hōnā[fut.m.sg.23]  ? see[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] , service in yes , yes do[pres.pl.m.12hon3] then kingdom in what be[fut.m.sg.23]  ?

442Whenever any task is to be performed, whom do you claim a right over? 443You consider it your right over Gujarat.

295जी हजूर , जी हजूर . jī hajūr , jī hajūr . jīnā[past-part.f.]|jīnā[root]|jī[x] hajūr , jīnā[past-part.f.]|jīnā[root]|jī[x] hajūr . (live[past-part.f.]|live[root]|ji) Lord , (live[past-part.f.]|live[root]|ji) Lord .

444So what is the speciality of Gujarat?

296तो सहयोग देने में नम्बरवन हैं क्योंकि ड्रामानुसार नजदीक का भाग्य मिला हुआ है . tō sahyōg dēnē mē̃ number one haĩ kyōṅki ḍrāmānusār najdīk kā bhāgya milā huā hai . tō sahyōg[n.m.;sg.,d.] dēnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] mē̃[postp.] number one hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] kyōṅki ḍrāmānusār nazdīk kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] bhāgya[n.m.;sg.,d.] milānā[root]|milnā[past-part.m.sg.d.] hōnā[pres-perf.sg.m.23] . then cooperation give[inf.m.pl.,o.] in number one be[pres.pl.12hon3] because x x of x (x[root]|receive[past-part.m.sg.d.]) be[pres-perf.sg.m.23] .

445To have a right in service also. 446Those who have a right over service will of course have a right to the kingdom.

297अभी अगर गुजरात को कहें कि सभी भले एक ­ एक बस तैयार करके पहुँच जायें तो कितनी बसें आयेंगी  ? abhī agar gujarāt kō kahē̃ ki sabhī bhalē ēk ­ ēk bas taiyār karkē pahũch jāyē̃ tō kitnī basē̃ āyēṅgī  ? ab[adv.hī] agar gujarāt kō[postp.] kahnā[opt.pl.12hon3] ki[conj.] sab[adv.hī] bhalā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] ēk[adj.] ­ ēk[adj.] basnā[root]|bas taiyār[adj.] karnā[abs.] pahuñchnā[opt.pl.12hon3.root+jānā] tō kitnā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] basnā[opt.pl.12hon3] ānā[fut.f.pl.12hon3]  ? now if Gujarat to say[opt.pl.12hon3] that all benefit one ­ one (x[root]|simply) x do[abs.] reach[opt.pl.12hon3.root+jānā] then so x[opt.pl.12hon3] come[fut.f.pl.12hon3]  ?

447You say Ha ji, ha ji in service, and so what will you have in the kingdom? 448"Yes, my Lord Yes, my Lord". 449Is the number of Gujarat less than that of Maharashtra?

298बहुत आ जायेंगी ना  ! bahut ā jāyēṅgī nā  ! bahut ānā[fut.f.pl.12hon3.root+jānā] nā  ! very come[fut.f.pl.12hon3.root+jānā] ∅  !

450It is a little less.

299तो एवररेडी संख्या तो है ना  ! tō ever ready saṅkhyā tō hai nā  ! tō ever ready saṅkhyā[n.f.;sg.] tō hōnā[pres.sg.23] nā  ! then ever-ready x then be[pres.sg.23] ∅  !

451Now, do not let it be any less.

300महाराष्ट्र को , दूर वालों को बुलाओ तो दूर के कारण मुश्किल होता है . mahārāṣhṭra kō , dūr vālō̃ kō bulāō tō dūr kē|K kāraṇ muśhkil hōtā hai . mahārāṣhṭra[n.m.;sg.,d.] kō[postp.] , dūr[adj.] vālā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] kō[postp.] bulānā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] tō dūr[adj.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K kāraṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.] muśhkil[adj.] hōnā[pres.sg.m.23] . Maharashtra to , distant those who to call[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] then distant (of|K) because difficult be[pres.sg.m.23] .

452In fact you are number one in giving co­ operation, because according to the drama, you have received the fortune of being close.

301लेकिन गुजरात को तो भाग्य है . lēkin gujarāt kō tō bhāgya hai . lēkin gujarāt kō[postp.] tō bhāgya[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] . but Gujarat to then x be[pres.sg.23] .

453Now, if Gujarat is told to prepare a bus from each centre, how many buses would come?

302और सेवा में जिम्मेदारी उठाने वाले भी अच्छे ­ अच्छे हैं . aur sēvā mē̃ jimmēdārī uṭhānē vālē bhī achchhē ­ achchhē haĩ . aur sēvā[n.f.;sg.] mē̃[postp.] x uṭhānā[inf.m.pl.,o.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] bhī[p.] achchhā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] ­ achchhā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] . and service in x uplift[inf.m.pl.,o.] those who too achcha ­ achcha be[pres.pl.12hon3] . 303पूछ ­ पूछ करने वाले नहीं हैं . pūchh ­ pūchh karnē vālē nahī̃ haĩ . pūchhnā[root] ­ pūchhnā[root] karnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] nahī̃[neg] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] . ask[root] ­ ask[root] do[inf.m.pl.,o.] those who not be[pres.pl.12hon3] .

454Many would come, would they not? 455So you are ever­ready, are you not? 456If you call those from Maharashtra who are faraway; they will come with great difficulty.

304जिम्मेदारी उठाने में अच्छे हैं . jimmēdārī uṭhānē mē̃ achchhē haĩ . x uṭhānā[inf.m.pl.,o.] mē̃[postp.] achchhā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] . x uplift[inf.m.pl.,o.] in achcha be[pres.pl.12hon3] .

457Because of being far away, they find it difficult.

305तो ये भी ड्रामा में भाग्य स्वतः ही प्राप्त है , जो रेडी हो जाते हैं , जितनों को ऑर्डर करते हैं आ जाते हैं . tō yē bhī drama mē̃ bhāgya svataḥ hī prāpt hai , jō ready hō jātē haĩ , jitnō̃ kō order kartē haĩ ā jātē haĩ . tō yah[pn.pl.d.] bhī[p.] drama mē̃[postp.] bhāgya[n.m.;sg.,d.] svataḥ hī[p.] prāpt[adj.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] , jō[pn.;d.] ready hōnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3.root+jānā] , jitnā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] kō[postp.] order karnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] ānā[pres.pl.m.12hon3.root+jānā] . then this too drama in x automatically only reached be[pres.sg.23] , that ready be[pres.pl.m.12hon3.root+jānā] , the more to order do[pres.pl.m.12hon3] come[pres.pl.m.12hon3.root+jānā] .

458However, Gujarat has the fortune and they are also very good in taking responsibility for service. 459They are not those who constantly ask questions. 460They are good in taking up any responsibility.

306 ( दादी से ) अभी देखो मेले के लिए आप निश्चिन्त हो ना . ( dādī sē ) abhī dēkhō mēlē kē liē āp niśhchinta hō nā . ( dādī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] sē[postp.] ) ab[adv.hī] dēkhnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] mēlā[x] kē liē[x] āp[pn.pl.] niśhchint[x] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] nā . ( Dadi from ) now see[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] fair for you without worry (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) ∅ .

461So this is also the fortune you have automatically received within the drama.

307क्योंकि गुजरात ने जिम्मेदारी उठाई . kyōṅki gujarāt nē jimmēdārī uṭhāī . kyōṅki gujarāt nē[postp.] x uṭhānā[past-part.f.] . because Gujarat ∅ x uplift[past-part.f.] .

462Those who are ready, however many a reordered, will all come.

308तो बापदादा भी जिम्मेदारी का ताज पहनने वाले बच्चों को देखकर खुश होते हैं . tō bāpdādā bhī jimmēdārī kā tāj pahannē vālē bachchō̃ kō dēkhkar khuśh hōtē haĩ . tō bāpdādā bhī[p.] x kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] tāj[n.m.;sg.,d.] pahannā[inf.m.pl.,o.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] bachchā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] kō[postp.] dēkhnā[abs.] khuśh[adj.] hōnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] . then BapDada too x of crown x[inf.m.pl.,o.] those who child to see[abs.] happy be[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

463(Speaking to Dadiji): Look, you are now carefree about the mela, are you not? 464Because Gujarat has taken the responsibility.

309भोपाल - भोपाल की संख्या कितनी है  ? bhōpāl - bhōpāl kī|key saṅkhyā kitnī hai  ? bhōpāl - bhōpāl karnā[past-part.f.]|kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|key saṅkhyā[n.f.;sg.] kitnā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] hōnā[pres.sg.23]  ? Bhopal - Bhopal (do[past-part.f.]|of|key) x so be[pres.sg.23]  ?

465So BapDada is also happy; He is happy to see the children who wear the crown of responsibility.

310 ( 5 हजार ) बहुत थोड़ी है . ( 5 hajār ) bahut thōṛī hai . ( 5 hazār[n.m.;sg.,d.] ) bahut thōṛā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] . ( 5 1000 ) very short be[pres.sg.23] .

466Bhopal:How many are there in Bhopal?

311तो क्या करेंगे  ? tō kyā karē̃gē  ? tō kyā karnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3]  ? then what do[fut.m.pl.12hon3]  ?

467(5,000). 468Is that all?

312पांच हजार के आगे एक बिन्दी लगायेंगे . pāñch hajār kē āgē ēk bindī lagāyēṅgē . pañch[adj.] hazār[n.m.;sg.,d.] kē āgē[x] ēk[adj.] bindī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] lagānā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] . five 1000 in front of one point attach[fut.m.pl.12hon3] .

469Only 5,000! 470It is very little. 471What are you thinking?

313अच्छी प्रजा लायेंगे ना  ! achchhī prajā lāyēṅgē nā  ! achchhā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] prajā[n.m.;sg.,d.] lānā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] nā  ! achcha x x[fut.m.pl.12hon3] ∅  !

472Those from Bhopal, raise your hands. 473What will you do?

314अच्छा है , सदा विधि द्वारा सहज वृद्धि को प्राप्त करने वाली श्रेष्ठ आत्मायें . achchhā hai , sadā vidhi dvārā sahaj vr̥iddhi kō prāpt karnē vālī śhrēṣhṭh ātmāyē̃ . achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] , sadā vidhi[n.m.;sg.,d.] dvārā sahaj[adj.] vr̥iddhi[n.f.;sg.] kō[postp.] prāpt[adj.] karnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] vālā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] śhrēṣhṭha[adj.] ātmā[n.f.+ē̃;pl.d.] . achcha be[pres.sg.23] , constantly method through easy growth to reached do[inf.m.pl.,o.] those who elevated soul .

474Simply add a point (zero) infront of 5,000. Will you do this? 475You will bring a good number of subjects, will you not?

315जल्दी वृद्धि को प्राप्त करेंगे ना  ? jaldī vr̥iddhi kō prāpt karē̃gē nā  ? jaldī vr̥iddhi[n.f.;sg.] kō[postp.] prāpt karnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] nā  ? very quickly growth to reach ∅  ?

476It is good. 477You are the elevated souls who constantly attain expansion by adopting the right method.

316फिर भी सेवा के साधन अच्छे हैं . phir bhī sēvā kē|K sādhan achchhē haĩ . phir bhī[x] sēvā[n.f.;sg.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K sādhan[n.m.;sg.,d.] achchhā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] . nevertheless service (of|K) facilities achcha be[pres.pl.12hon3] .

478You will expand very quickly, will you not? 479Say yes or no.

317अगर दो ­ चार माइक तैयार कर लो तो बिन्दी लगना कोई मुश्किल नहीं होगी और चांस है . agar dō ­ chār mike taiyār kar lō tō bindī lagnā kōī muśhkil nahī̃ hōgī aur chance hai . agar dō[adj.]|dēnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] ­ chār[adj.] mike taiyār[adj.] karnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2.root+lēnā] tō bindī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] lagnā[inf.m.sg.d.] kōī[pn.;d.] muśhkil[adj.] nahī̃[neg] hōnā[fut.f.sg.23] aur chance hōnā[pres.sg.23] . if (two|give[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2]) ­ four mike x do[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2.root+lēnā] then point x[inf.m.sg.d.] some difficult not be[fut.f.sg.23] and chance be[pres.sg.23] .

480You are giving a very weak response. 481No, you still have good means of service. 482If you prepare two to four "mikes", it would not be difficult to add the zeros.

318देखो सेन्ट्रल वाले समय मुश्किल देते हैं और स्टेट वाले समय सहज देते हैं , सम्बन्ध ­ सम्पर्क में सहज आ सकते हैं इसलिये माइक तैयार करो . dēkhō sēnṭral vālē samay muśhkil dētē haĩ aur state vālē samay sahaj dētē haĩ , sambandh ­ samparka mē̃ sahaj ā saktē haĩ isliyē mike taiyār karō . dēkhnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] x vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] samay[n.m.;sg.,d.] muśhkil[adj.] dēnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] aur state vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] samay[n.m.;sg.,d.] sahaj[adj.] dēnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] , sambandh[n.m.;sg.,d.] ­ sampark[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] sahaj[adj.] ānā[pres.pl.m.12hon3.root+saknā] isliē mike taiyār[adj.] karnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] . see[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] x those who time difficult give[pres.pl.m.12hon3] and x those who time easy give[pres.pl.m.12hon3] , relationship ­ x in easy come[pres.pl.m.12hon3.root+saknā] therefore mike x do[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

483You also have a chance. 484Look at the "mikes" in the States and the "mikes" in the Central Government, those from the Central Government give time with great difficulty whereas those from the States come easily.

319तो माइक तैयार करने से उनके पीछे अनेक आत्मायें सहज आ जाती हैं . tō mike taiyār karnē sē unkē pīchhē anēk ātmāyē̃ sahaj ā jātī haĩ . tō mike taiyār[adj.] karnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] sē[postp.] vah[pn.pl.kē] pīchhē anēk[adj.] ātmā[n.f.+ē̃;pl.d.] sahaj[adj.] ānā[pres.pl.f.12hon3.root+jānā] . then mike x do[inf.m.pl.,o.] from that[.kē] x many soul easy come[pres.pl.f.12hon3.root+jānā] .

485They can come into contact and connection. 486And those from the Central Government take time in looking after their seat.

320एक के आवाज से अनेकों का कल्याण हो सकता है . ēk kē|K āvāj sē anēkō̃ kā kalyāṇ hō saktā hai . ēk[adj.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K āvāz[n.f.;sg.] sē[postp.] anēk[n.m.+ō̃;pl.o.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] kalyāṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.m.23.root+saknā] . one (of|K) noise from many of benefit be[pres.sg.m.23.root+saknā] .

487This is why you must now prepare "mikes". 488By your preparing the "mikes", many souls will easily come.

321उन्हों को सिर्फ स्नेही , सम्पर्क वाले नहीं बनाओ लेकिन नजदीक सम्बन्धी बनाओ . unhō̃ kō sirph snēhī , samparka vālē nahī̃ banāō lēkin najdīk sambandhī banāō . vah[pn.pl.o.] kō[postp.] sirph[adj.] snēhī[adj.] , sampark[n.m.;sg.,d.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] nahī̃[neg] banānā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] lēkin nazdīk sambandhī[n.m.;sg.,d.] banānā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] . that to only loving , x those who not create[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] but x relative create[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

489Many can benefit through the sound from one. o not just make them into loving souls, do not just make them into those who are in your connection, but bring them into close relationship. 490So, what will those from Bhopal do?

322तो भोपाल वाले माइक तैयार करके लायेंगे  ? tō bhōpāl vālē mike taiyār karkē lāyēṅgē  ? tō bhōpāl vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] mike taiyār[adj.] karnā[abs.] lānā[fut.m.pl.12hon3]  ? then Bhopal those who mike x do[abs.] x[fut.m.pl.12hon3]  ?

491Whom will you bring? 492Will you prepare the "mikes" and bring them, or are they already ready?

323कि हुए ही पड़े हैं  ? ki huē hī paṛē haĩ  ? ki[conj.] hōnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.] hī[p.] paṛnā[pres-perf.pl.m.12hon3]  ? that be[past-part.m.pl.,o.] only fall[pres-perf.pl.m.12hon3]  ?

493You can bring them, there is a good margin for this.

324ला सकते हो , मार्जिन अच्छी है . lā saktē hō , margin achchhī hai . lānā[pres.pl.m.2.root+saknā] , margin achchhā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] . x[pres.pl.m.2.root+saknā] , x achcha be[pres.sg.23] .

494You have a relationship with them, but let your relationship be even closer.

325सम्बन्ध है लेकिन थोड़ा और सम्बन्ध नजदीक का हो . sambandh hai lēkin thōṛā aur sambandh najdīk kā hō . sambandh[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] lēkin thōṛā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] aur sambandh[n.m.;sg.,d.] nazdīk kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] . relationship be[pres.sg.23] but short and relationship x of (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) .

495So you are those who constantly expand with the elevated method. 496Do you understand what your speciality is?

326तो सदा श्रेष्ठ विधि द्वारा वृद्धि को प्राप्त करने वाले . tō sadā śhrēṣhṭh vidhi dvārā vr̥iddhi kō prāpt karnē vālē . tō sadā śhrēṣhṭha[adj.] vidhi[n.m.;sg.,d.] dvārā vr̥iddhi[n.f.;sg.] kō[postp.] prāpt[adj.] karnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] . then constantly elevated method through growth to reached do[inf.m.pl.,o.] those who .

497You are those who expand easily. 498Mothers from Bhopal, raise your hands. 499You mothers have courage, do you not?

327समझा , क्या विशेषता है  ? samjhā , kyā viśhēṣhtā hai  ? samjhānā[root]|samajhnā[past-part.m.sg.d.] , kyā viśhēṣhtā[n.f.;sg.] hōnā[pres.sg.23]  ? (explain[root]|understand[past-part.m.sg.d.]) , what speciality be[pres.sg.23]  ?

500Say yes or no. 501You have become introverted.

328सहज वृद्धि करने वाले . sahaj vr̥iddhi karnē vālē . sahaj[adj.] vr̥iddhi[n.f.;sg.] karnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] . easy growth do[inf.m.pl.,o.] those who .

502You have begun to think who to bring from now.

329अच्छा . achchhā . achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] . achcha .

503Achcha.

330राजस्थान - राजस्थान में आबू वाले भी हैं कि अलग हैं  ? rājasthān - rājasthān mē̃ ābū vālē bhī haĩ ki alag haĩ  ? rājasthān - rājasthān mē̃[postp.] ābū vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] bhī[p.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] ki[conj.] alag[adj.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3]  ? x - x in Abu those who too be[pres.pl.12hon3] that separate be[pres.pl.12hon3]  ?

504Rajasthan:Are those from Abu included in Rajasthan or are they separate? 505You are central and that is a centre.

331ये सेन्ट्रल है , वो सेन्टर है . yē sēnṭral hai , vō centre hai . yah[pn.pl.d.] x hōnā[pres.sg.23] , vah[pn.;d.] centre hōnā[pres.sg.23] . this x be[pres.sg.23] , that centre be[pres.sg.23] .

506You are clever. 507You do not wish to be mixed with them (Rajasthan).

332मुख्य केन्द्र राजस्थान में है , ये तो कमाल है राजस्थान की . mukhya kēndra rājasthān mē̃ hai , yē tō kamāl hai rājasthān kī|key . mukhya[adj.] kēndra[n.m.;sg.,d.] rājasthān mē̃[postp.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] , yah[pn.pl.d.] tō kamāl[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] rājasthān karnā[past-part.f.]|kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|key . main centre x in be[pres.sg.23] , this then x be[pres.sg.23] x (do[past-part.f.]|of|key) .

508It is good. 509Those from Rajasthan have performed a wonder that the main centre is in Rajasthan.

333लाइट हाउस तो राजस्थान में ही हुआ ना . light house tō rājasthān mē̃ hī huā nā . light house[x] tō rājasthān mē̃[postp.] hī[p.] hōnā[past-part.m.sg.d.] nā . lighthouse then x in only be[past-part.m.sg.d.] ∅ .

510The main centre is in Rajasthan. 511This is a wonder of Rajasthan.

334अभी सेन्ट्रल में हो गया लाइट हाउस और सेन्टर्स पर क्या है  ? abhī sēnṭral mē̃ hō gayā light house aur centres par kyā hai  ? ab[adv.hī] x mē̃[postp.] hōnā[past-part.m.sg.d..root+jānā] light house[x] aur centre par[postp.]|par[adj.] kyā hōnā[pres.sg.23]  ? now x in be[past-part.m.sg.d..root+jānā] lighthouse and centre (at|other) what be[pres.sg.23]  ?

512So, the lighthouse is in Rajasthan, is it not? 513Now the lighthouse is in the central place. 514And what is there at the centres?

335लाइट है या लाइट हाउस है  ? light hai yā light house hai  ? light hōnā[pres.sg.23] yā light house[x] hōnā[pres.sg.23]  ? light be[pres.sg.23] or lighthouse be[pres.sg.23]  ?

515Is there just the light or are there the might­houses?

336जयपुर लाइट है या लाइट हाउस है  ? jaypur light hai yā light house hai  ? jaypur light hōnā[pres.sg.23] yā light house[x] hōnā[pres.sg.23]  ? x light be[pres.sg.23] or lighthouse be[pres.sg.23]  ?

516Those from Rajasthan, speak: Is there just the light or the might­houses?

337कितनी जगह लाइट दिया है  ? kitnī jagah light diyā hai  ? kitnā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] jagah[n.f.;sg.] light dēnā[pres-perf.sg.m.23]  ? so x light give[pres-perf.sg.m.23]  ?

517Achcha. 518Which cities have come from Rajasthan?

338लाइट हाउस का काम क्या होता है  ? light house kā kām kyā hōtā hai  ? light house[x] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] kām[n.m.;sg.,d.]|kām[n.m.;sg.,d.] kyā hōnā[pres.sg.m.23]  ? lighthouse of (task|lust) what be[pres.sg.m.23]  ?

519(Jaipur) Those from Jaipur, raise your hands.

339चारों ओर लाइट देना या सिर्फ आस ­ पास लाइट देना  ? chārō̃ ōr light dēnā yā sirph ās ­ pās|pass light dēnā  ? chārō̃ ōr[x] light dēnā[inf.m.sg.d.] yā sirph[adj.] ās-pās ­ pās|pass light dēnā[inf.m.sg.d.]  ? everywhere light give[inf.m.sg.d.] or only x ­ (x|pass) light give[inf.m.sg.d.]  ?

520Does Jaipur simply have light or is it a lighthouse? 521Speak. 522What are you? 523You are a lighthouse.

340चारों ओर लाइट देते हैं ना . chārō̃ ōr light dētē haĩ nā . chārō̃ ōr[x] light dēnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] nā . everywhere light give[pres.pl.m.12hon3] ∅ .

524How many places have you given light to? 525What is the task of a lighthouse?

341तो राजस्थान को चारों ओर राजस्थान में लाइट देना है . tō rājasthān kō chārō̃ ōr rājasthān mē̃ light dēnā hai . tō rājasthān kō[postp.] chārō̃ ōr[x] rājasthān mē̃[postp.] light dēnā[pres.sg.23.oblig1] . then x to everywhere x in light give[pres.sg.23.oblig1] .

526To give light in all four directions or only to those close by? 527You give light in all four directions, do you not?

342जगाया तो है , जयपुर , जोधपुर , उदयपुर … आदि में जगाया तो है लेकिन अभी लाइट से लाइट हाउस बनाओ . jagāyā tō hai , jaypur , jōdhpur , udayapur … ādi mē̃ jagāyā tō hai lēkin abhī light sē light house banāō . jagānā[past-part.m.sg.d.] tō hōnā[pres.sg.23] , jaypur , jōdhpur[n.m.;sg.,d.] , x … ādi[adj.] mē̃[postp.] jagānā[past-part.m.sg.d.] tō hōnā[pres.sg.23] lēkin ab[adv.hī] light sē[postp.] light house[x] banānā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] . awaken[past-part.m.sg.d.] then be[pres.sg.23] , x , Jodhpur , x … etc. in awaken[past-part.m.sg.d.] then be[pres.sg.23] but now light from lighthouse create[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

528So, Rajasthan has to give light in all four directions of Rajasthan. 529You have awakened them, you have awakened them in Jaipur, you have awakened Jodhpur, you have also awakened Udaipur.

343राजस्थान में एक भी एरिया खुश्क नहीं रह जाये . rājasthān mē̃ ēk bhī area khuśka nahī̃ rah jāyē . rājasthān mē̃[postp.] ēk[adj.] bhī[p.] area x nahī̃[neg] rahnā[past-part.m.pl.,o..root+jānā] . x in one too x x not remain[past-part.m.pl.,o..root+jānā] .

530However, you now have to create lighthouses from just being light.

344राजस्थान को वैसे कहते हैं बड़ा खुश्क है लेकिन ब्राह्मण जीवन में सबसे हरा ­ भरा राजस्थान . rājasthān kō vaisē kahtē haĩ baṛā khuśka hai lēkin brāhmaṇ jīvan mē̃ sabsē harā ­ bharā rājasthān . rājasthān kō[postp.] vaisā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] kahnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] baṛā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] x hōnā[pres.sg.23] lēkin brāhmaṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.] jīvan[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] sabsē harā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.]|harānā[root]|harnā[past-part.m.sg.d.] ­ bharnā[past-part.m.sg.d.]|bharānā[root] rājasthān . x to x say[pres.pl.m.12hon3] very x be[pres.sg.23] but Brahmin life in the most (green|x[root]|x[past-part.m.sg.d.]) ­ (fill[past-part.m.sg.d.]|x[root]) x .

531Not a single area should remain dry. 532Rajasthan is said to be the driest place (in India) but in Brahmin life, Rajasthan has the most greenery.

345जो कहते हैं ना राजस्थान में रेत है तो रेत के बजाए सोने के महल हो जायेंगे . jō kahtē haĩ nā rājasthān mē̃ rēt hai tō rēt kē bajāē sōnē kē|K mahal hō jāyēṅgē . jō[pn.;d.] kahnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] nā rājasthān mē̃[postp.] rēt[n.f.;sg.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] tō rēt[n.f.;sg.] kē bajāē[x] sōnā[inf.m.pl.,o.]|sōnā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K mahal[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3.root+jānā] . that say[pres.pl.m.12hon3] ∅ x in sand be[pres.sg.23] then sand instead of (sleep[inf.m.pl.,o.]|gold) (of|K) palace be[fut.m.pl.12hon3.root+jānā] .

533People say that there is only sand in Rajasthan, and so instead of the sand, let them become palaces of gold.

346होना तो है ना  ! hōnā tō hai nā  ! hōnā[inf.m.sg.d.] tō hōnā[pres.sg.23] nā  ! be[inf.m.sg.d.] then be[pres.sg.23] ∅  !

534They will become this.

347तो रेती को सोना बनाओ . tō rētī kō sōnā banāō . tō rētī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] kō[postp.] sōnā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.]|sōnā[inf.m.sg.d.] banānā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] . then sand to (gold|sleep[inf.m.sg.d.]) create[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

535So now, change the sand into gold. 536What will Rajasthan do?

348राजस्थान क्या करेगा  ? rājasthān kyā karēgā  ? rājasthān kyā karnā[fut.m.sg.23]  ? x what do[fut.m.sg.23]  ?

537Will you prepare palaces of gold?

349सोने जैसी आत्मायें तैयार करेंगे और सोने के महल तैयार करेंगे . sōnē jaisī ātmāyē̃ taiyār karē̃gē aur sōnē kē|K mahal taiyār karē̃gē . sōnā[inf.m.pl.,o.]|sōnā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] jaisā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] ātmā[n.f.+ē̃;pl.d.] taiyār[adj.] karnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] aur sōnā[inf.m.pl.,o.]|sōnā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K mahal[n.m.;sg.,d.] taiyār[adj.] karnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] . (sleep[inf.m.pl.,o.]|gold) like soul x do[fut.m.pl.12hon3] and (sleep[inf.m.pl.,o.]|gold) (of|K) palace x do[fut.m.pl.12hon3] .

538You will prepare souls like gold and palaces of gold. 539Look, the capital will be in Delhi and so Rajasthan is so close.

350देखो , देहली में राजधानी बनेगी तो राजस्थान कितना नजदीक है . dēkhō , dēhlī mē̃ rājdhānī banēgī tō rājasthān kitnā najdīk hai . dēkhnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] , dēhlī mē̃[postp.] rājdhānī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] bannā[fut.f.sg.23] tō rājasthān kitnā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] nazdīk hōnā[pres.sg.23] . see[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] , Delhi in kingdom become[fut.f.sg.23] then x so x be[pres.sg.23] .

540So the palaces will be built there also, will they not? 541Will everyone come in Delhi or will they also live close by?

351तो वहाँ भी बनेंगे ना . tō vahā̃ bhī banē̃gē nā . tō vahā̃ bhī[p.] bannā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] nā . then there too become[fut.m.pl.12hon3] ∅ .

542So what will Rajasthan do?

352तो राजस्थान मिट्टी को सोना बनायेगा . tō rājasthān miṭṭī kō sōnā banāyēgā . tō rājasthān miṭṭī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] kō[postp.] sōnā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.]|sōnā[inf.m.sg.d.] banānā[fut.m.sg.23] . then x mud to (gold|sleep[inf.m.sg.d.]) create[fut.m.sg.23] .

543You will change the dust into gold. 544You have this much enthusiasm, do you not?

353इतना उमंग है ना  ? itnā umaṅg hai nā  ? itnā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] umaṅg[n.f.;sg.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] nā  ? such zeal be[pres.sg.23] ∅  ? 354राजस्थान को परिस्तान बनाने वाले . rājasthān kō paristān banānē vālē . rājasthān kō[postp.] paristān[n.m.;sg.,d.] banānā[inf.m.pl.,o.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] . x to land of angels create[inf.m.pl.,o.] those who .

545Rajasthan means those who change Rajasthan into Paristhan (the land of angels.)

355चारों ओर परिस्तान की खुशबू दिखाई दे . chārō̃ ōr paristān kī|key khuśhbū dikhāī dē . chārō̃ ōr[x] paristān[n.m.;sg.,d.] karnā[past-part.f.]|kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|key khuśhbū[n.f.;sg.] dikhāī dēnā[opt.sg.23] . everywhere land of angels (do[past-part.f.]|of|key) fragrance be visible .

546The fragrance of Paristhan should be visible in all four directions.

356संख्या भी बढ़ाओ और संख्या के साथ ­ साथ माइक भी तैयार करो . saṅkhyā bhī baṛhāō aur saṅkhyā kē sāth ­ sāth mike bhī taiyār karō . saṅkhyā[n.f.;sg.] bhī[p.] baṛhānā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] aur saṅkhyā[n.f.;sg.] kē sāth[x] ­ sāth[n.m.;sg.,d.] mike bhī[p.] taiyār[adj.] karnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] . x too increase[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] and x with ­ with mike too x do[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

547Increase the numbers and together with the numbers, prepare such souls.

357हर एक स्टेट के सहज माइक निकाल सकते हैं . har ēk state kē|K sahaj mike nikāl saktē haĩ . har ēk[x] state kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K sahaj[adj.] mike nikālnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3.root+saknā] . each one x (of|K) easy mike x[pres.pl.m.12hon3.root+saknā] .

548You have already been told that each state can bring a "mike" easily.

358चाहे छोटा माइक हो , चाहे बड़ा हो , चलो बड़ा नहीं तो छोटा ही सही . chāhē chhōṭā mike hō , chāhē baṛā hō , chalō baṛā nahī̃ tō chhōṭā hī sahī . chāhnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|chāhē|chāhnā[opt.sg.23] chhōṭā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] mike hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] , chāhnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|chāhē|chāhnā[opt.sg.23] baṛā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] , chalnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] baṛā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] nahī̃ tō[x] chhōṭā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hī[p.] sahī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] . (x[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|whether|x[opt.sg.23]) small mike (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) , (x[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|whether|x[opt.sg.23]) very (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) , continue[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] very otherwise small only x .

549Whether he is a small "mike" or a big one, if not a big "mike" then even a small "mike" is all right.

359देखो राजस्थान के माइक ने कमाल तो किया ना . dēkhō rājasthān kē|K mike nē kamāl tō kiyā nā . dēkhnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] rājasthān kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K mike nē[postp.] kamāl[n.m.;sg.,d.] tō karnā[past-part.m.sg.d.] nā . see[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] x (of|K) mike ∅ x then do[past-part.m.sg.d.] ∅ .

550Look, the small "mike" of Rajasthan performed wonders, did he not?

360आज ज्ञान सरोवर में माइक ने ही काम किया ना . āj gyān sarōvar mē̃ mike nē hī kām kiyā nā . āj gyān sarōvar[x] mē̃[postp.] mike nē[postp.] hī[p.] kām[n.m.;sg.,d.]|kām[n.m.;sg.,d.] karnā[past-part.m.sg.d.] nā . today Gyan Sarovar in mike ∅ only (task|lust) do[past-part.m.sg.d.] ∅ .

551Today, it is the "mike" who carried out the work for Gyan Sarovar.

361तो हर स्टेट को महाराष्ट्र , कर्नाटक … जो भी हैं , सभी स्टेट को माइक तैयार करने चाहिये . tō har|her state kō mahārāṣhṭra , karnāṭak … jō bhī haĩ , sabhī state kō mike taiyār karnē chāhiyē . tō har|harnā[root]|her state kō[postp.] mahārāṣhṭra[n.m.;sg.,d.] , karnāṭak[n.m.;sg.,d.] … jō[pn.;d.] bhī[p.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] , sab[adv.hī] state kō[postp.] mike taiyār[adj.] karnā[.oblig3] . then (x|x[root]) x to Maharashtra , Karnataka … that too be[pres.pl.12hon3] , all x to mike x do[.oblig3] .

552So, each state, Maharashtra, Karnataka or whichever state, each state has to prepare a "mike".

362और एक ­ एक स्टेट के माइक अगर सभी मिल जायेंगे तो संगठन बन जायेगा और संगठन का आवाज सहज फैलेगा . aur ēk ­ ēk state kē|K mike agar sabhī mil jāyēṅgē tō saṅgaṭhan ban jāyēgā aur saṅgaṭhan kā āvāj sahaj phailēgā . aur ēk[adj.] ­ ēk[adj.] state kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K mike agar sab[adv.hī] milnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3.root+jānā] tō saṅgaṭhan[x] bannā[fut.m.sg.23.root+jānā] aur saṅgaṭhan[x] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] āvāz[n.f.;sg.] sahaj[adj.] phailnā[fut.m.sg.23] . and one ­ one x (of|K) mike if all receive[fut.m.pl.12hon3.root+jānā] then gathering become[fut.m.sg.23.root+jānā] and gathering of noise easy spread[fut.m.sg.23] .

553And if all the "mikes" from all the states come together, a gathering will be created. 554And the sound from a gathering will spread very easily.

363तो राजस्थान वाले माला भी तैयार करना और माइक भी . tō rājasthān vālē mālā bhī taiyār karnā aur mike bhī . tō rājasthān vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] mālā[n.f.;sg.] bhī[p.] taiyār[adj.] karnā[inf.m.sg.d.] aur mike bhī[p.] . then x those who garland too x do[inf.m.sg.d.] and mike too .

555So will Rajasthan prepare the rosary or the "mikes"? 556What will you do?

364अच्छा . achchhā . achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] . achcha .

557You have to prepare both.

365आगरा - आगरा वाले क्या करेंगे  ? āgrā - āgrā vālē kyā karē̃gē  ? āgrā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] - āgrā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] kyā karnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3]  ? Agra - Agra those who what do[fut.m.pl.12hon3]  ?

558A rosary and also the "mikes". 559Achcha.

366जैसे आगरा में मिट्टी का , इंटों का ताजमहलआकर्षित करता है वैसे आगरा में ये प्रसिद्ध हो जाये कि यहाँ ताजमहल तो है लेकिन ताजधारी भी गुप्त वेश में हैं . jaisē āgrā mē̃ miṭṭī kā , iṇṭō̃ kā tājamahalaākarṣit kartā hai vaisē āgrā mē̃ yē prasiddh hō jāyē ki yahā̃ tājmahal tō hai lēkin tājdhārī bhī gupta vēśh mē̃ haĩ . jaisā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] āgrā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] mē̃[postp.] miṭṭī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] , x kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] x karnā[pres.sg.m.23] vaisā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] āgrā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] mē̃[postp.] yah[pn.pl.d.] prasiddh[adj.] hōnā[past-part.m.pl.,o..root+jānā] ki[conj.] yahā̃ tājmahal[n.m.;sg.,d.] tō hōnā[pres.sg.23] lēkin tājdhārī[adj.] bhī[p.] gupt[adj.] vēśh[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] . like Agra in mud of , x of x do[pres.sg.m.23] x Agra in this x be[past-part.m.pl.,o..root+jānā] that here Taj Mahal then be[pres.sg.23] but crowned too incognito x in be[pres.pl.12hon3] .

560Agra: What will those from Agra do? 561Now, create such a place, so that just as the Taj Mahal of cement and bricks attracts everyone, in the same way, it should be well known that the Taj Mahal is here, but also those wearing the crown are also here in an incognito form.

367सिर्फ ताजमहल देखने नहीं आयें लेकिन यहाँ ताजधारी कौन हैं-वो भी देखने आयें . sirph tājmahal dēkhnē nahī̃ āyē̃ lēkin yahā̃ tājdhārī kaun haĩ-vō bhī dēkhnē āyē̃ . sirph[adj.] tājmahal[n.m.;sg.,d.] dēkhnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] nahī̃[neg] ānā[opt.pl.12hon3] lēkin yahā̃ tājdhārī[adj.] kaun[pn.;d.] x bhī[p.] dēkhnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] ānā[opt.pl.12hon3] . only Taj Mahal see[inf.m.pl.,o.] not come[opt.pl.12hon3] but here crowned who x too see[inf.m.pl.,o.] come[opt.pl.12hon3] .

562So they should not just come to seethe Taj Mahal, but they should also come to see those who are wearing the crown.

368आपको ढूंढे कि कहाँ हैं  ? āpkō ḍhūṇḍhē ki kahā̃ haĩ  ? āp[pn.pl.kō] x ki[conj.] kahā̃ hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3]  ? you[.kō] x that where be[pres.pl.12hon3]  ?

563They should come to look for you.

369इतनी ताजधारी आत्माओं की आकर्षण हो . itnī tājdhārī ātmāō̃ kī|key ākarṣhaṇ hō . itnā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] tājdhārī[adj.] ātmā[n.f.+ō̃;pl.o.] karnā[past-part.f.]|kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|key ākarṣhaṇ[x] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] . such crowned soul (do[past-part.f.]|of|key) attraction (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) .

564Let there be such an attraction of the souls who are wearing the crown.

370उन्हों को वायब्रेशन आये कि यहाँ कोई श्रेष्ठ आत्मायें गुप्त हुए वेश में है . unhō̃ kō vibration āyē ki yahā̃ kōī śhrēṣhṭh ātmāyē̃ gupta huē vēśh mē̃ hai . vah[pn.pl.o.] kō[postp.] vibration ānā[opt.sg.23]|ānā[past-part.m.pl.,o.] ki[conj.] yahā̃ kōī[pn.;d.] śhrēṣhṭha[adj.] ātmā[n.f.+ē̃;pl.d.] gupt[adj.] hōnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.] vēśh[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] . that to vibrations (come[opt.sg.23]|come[past-part.m.pl.,o.]) that here some elevated soul incognito be[past-part.m.pl.,o.] x in be[pres.sg.23] .

565They should receive the vibrations that some elevated souls are hidden in an incognito form.

371जैसे द्वापर में जो ऋषि ­ मुनि सतोप्रधान स्थिति में थे तो दूर से ही प्रभाव पड़ता था ना , ढूँढ करके उन्हों के पास पहुँचाते थे . jaisē dvāpar mē̃ jō r̥iṣhi ­ muni satōpradhān sthiti mē̃ thē tō dūr sē hī prabhāv paṛtā thā nā , ḍhūṇḍh karkē unhō̃ kē pās pahuñchātē thē . jaisā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] dvāpar mē̃[postp.] jō[pn.;d.] r̥iṣhi[n.m.;sg.,d.] ­ muni[n.m.;sg.,d.] satōpradhān[adj.] sthiti[n.f.;sg.] mē̃[postp.] hōnā[past.pl] tō dūr[adj.] sē[postp.] hī[p.] prabhāv[n.m.;sg.,d.] paṛnā[hab-past.m.sg.] nā , ḍhūṇḍhnā[root] karnā[abs.] vah[pn.pl.o.] kē pās[x] pahuñchānā[hab-past.pl.m.] . like copper age in that Rishi ­ muni satopradhan stage in be[past.pl] then distant from only x fall[hab-past.m.sg.] ∅ , discover[root] do[abs.] that to cause to reach[hab-past.pl.m.] .

566It should be just as when the rishis and munis were in their satopradhan stage in the copper age and were able to spread their influence into the distance. 567People would search for them and provide for their livelihood.

372वो खुद तो नहीं बुलाते थे . vō khud tō nahī̃ bulātē thē . vah[pn.;d.] khud tō nahī̃[neg] bulānā[hab-past.pl.m.] . that oneself then not call[hab-past.pl.m.] .

568The rishis and munis themselves did not call anyone.

373तो जब ऋषि ­ मुनि आत्मिक ज्ञान वालेआकर्षित कर सकते हैं तो परमात्म ज्ञानी क्या नहीं कर सकते  ! tō jab r̥iṣhi ­ muni ātmik gyān vālēākarṣit kar saktē haĩ tō paramātma gyānī kyā nahī̃ kar saktē  ! tō jab r̥iṣhi[n.m.;sg.,d.] ­ muni[n.m.;sg.,d.] ātmik[adj.] gyān[n.m.;sg.,d.] x karnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3.root+saknā] tō paramātmā[n.m.;sg.,d.] gyānī[adj.] kyā nahī̃[neg] karnā[root] saknā[pres-part.m.pl.,o.]  ! then when Rishi ­ muni soul-conscious knowledge x do[pres.pl.m.12hon3.root+saknā] then Supreme Soul gyani what not do[root] can[pres-part.m.pl.,o.]  !

569When they, who only have the knowledge of the soul, are able to attract people, what can those, who have the supreme knowledge, not do?

374तो हर एक अपने को ऐसा ताजधारी अर्थात् जिम्मेदार समझे , कि मेरी जिम्मेदारी है-लोगों को आकर्षितकर बाप का बनाना . tō har ēk apnē kō aisā tājdhārī arthāt jimmēdār samajhē , ki mērī jimmēdārī hai-lōgō̃ kō ākarṣitakar bāp kā banānā . tō har ēk[x] apnā[pn.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] kō[postp.] aisā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] tājdhārī[adj.] arthāt x samajhnā[opt.sg.23]|samajhnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.] , ki[conj.] maĩ[pn.sg.kī] x x kō[postp.] x bāp[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] banānā[inf.m.sg.d.] . then each one one’s own to such crowned that is x (understand[opt.sg.23]|understand[past-part.m.pl.,o.]) , that I[.kī] x x to x father of create[inf.m.sg.d.] .

570So each of you should consider yourself to be one who has such a crown, that is, each of you should consider yourself to be responsible for attracting people and making them belong to the Father. 571Do not make them belong to you, but to the Father.

375अपना नहीं बनाना , बाप का बनाना . apnā nahī̃ banānā , bāp kā banānā . apnānā[root]|apnā[pn.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] nahī̃[neg] banānā[inf.m.sg.d.] , bāp[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] banānā[inf.m.sg.d.] . (adopt[root]|one’s own) not create[inf.m.sg.d.] , father of create[inf.m.sg.d.] .

572So did those from Agra understand what they have to do?

376तो आगरा वाले यह नवीनता दिखाओ , जो सबकी नजर जाये . tō āgrā vālē yah navīntā dikhāō , jō sabkī najar jāyē . tō āgrā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] yah[pn.sg.d.] navīntā[n.f.;sg.] dikhānā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] , jō[pn.;d.] sabkā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] nazar[n.f.;sg.] jānā[past-part.m.pl.,o.] . then Agra those who this newness x[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] , that everyone's glance go[past-part.m.pl.,o.] .

573Bring about more newness. 574Show this newness so that everyone's vision is drawn.

377समझा  ? samjhā  ? samjhānā[root]|samajhnā[past-part.m.sg.d.]  ? (explain[root]|understand[past-part.m.sg.d.])  ?

575Do you understand?

378हीरे तैयार करो . hīrē taiyār karō . hīrā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] taiyār[adj.] karnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] . diamond x do[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

576Prepare the diamonds.

379ताज में झूठे हीरे हैं ना . tāj mē̃ jhūṭhē hīrē haĩ nā . tāj[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] jhūṭhā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] hīrā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] nā . crown in false diamond be[pres.pl.12hon3] ∅ .

577What is there in a crown? 578False diamonds.

380आप सच्चे हीरे तैयार करो . āp sachchē hīrē taiyār karō . āp[pn.pl.] sachchā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] hīrā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] taiyār[adj.] karnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] . you true diamond x do[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

579And what do you have to do? 580Prepare true diamonds.

381अच्छा  ! achchhā  ! achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.]  ! achcha  !

581Achcha.

382नेपाल - नेपाल को देश भी कहते हैं तो विदेश भी कहते हैं . nēpāl - nēpāl kō dēśh bhī kahtē haĩ tō vidēśh bhī kahtē haĩ . nēpāl[n.m.;sg.,d.] - nēpāl[n.m.;sg.,d.] kō[postp.] dēśh[n.m.;sg.,d.] bhī[p.] kahnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] tō vidēśh[n.m.;sg.,d.] bhī[p.] kahnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] . x - x to land too say[pres.pl.m.12hon3] then abroad too say[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

582Nepal:Their hats are not visible. 583They are not sitting together.

383डबल फायदा उठाते हैं . double phāydā uṭhātē haĩ . double fāydā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] uṭhānā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] . double profit uplift[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

584They are sitting individually. 585It isgood.

384जब फारेनर्स का टर्न होता तो कहते हैं हम फारेनर्स हैं , जब इण्डिया का टर्न होता है तो कहते हैं हम इण्डियन हैं . jab foreigners kā turn hōtā tō kahtē haĩ ham foreigners haĩ , jab india kā turn hōtā hai tō kahtē haĩ ham indian haĩ . jab foreigner kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] tum hōnā[pres-part.m.sg.d.] tō kahnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] ham[pn.pl.] foreigner hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] , jab India kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] tum hōnā[pres.sg.m.23] tō kahnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] ham[pn.pl.] Indian hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] . when foreigner of you be[pres-part.m.sg.d.] then say[pres.pl.m.12hon3] we foreigner be[pres.pl.12hon3] , when India of you be[pres.sg.m.23] then say[pres.pl.m.12hon3] we x be[pres.pl.12hon3] .

586Nepal is said to be part of this land as well as a foreign land. 587You take double benefit. 588When itis the foreigners' turn, you say that you are foreigners and when it is India's turn, you say that you are Indians.

385डबल चांस लेते हैं . double chance lētē haĩ . double chance lēnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] . double chance take[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

589You take a double chance.

386अच्छा है . achchhā hai . achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] . achcha be[pres.sg.23] .

590It is good.

387नेपाल के भी कई लोग भावना वाले बहुत हैं . nēpāl kē|K bhī kaī lōg bhāvnā vālē bahut haĩ . nēpāl[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K bhī[p.] kaī log[n.m.;sg.,d.] bhāvnā[n.f.;sg.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] bahut hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] . x (of|K) too some people feeling those who very be[pres.pl.12hon3] .

591Many people of Nepal have a lot of bhavna.

388प्यार से सुनने वाले अच्छे हैं . pyār sē sunnē vālē achchhē haĩ . pyār[n.m.;sg.,d.] sē[postp.] sunnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] achchhā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] . love from listen[inf.m.pl.,o.] those who achcha be[pres.pl.12hon3] .

592You are very good in listening with great love.

389नेपाल की धरनी में भी भावना अच्छी है . nēpāl kī|key dharnī mē̃ bhī bhāvnā achchhī hai . nēpāl[n.m.;sg.,d.] karnā[past-part.f.]|kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|key dharnā[inf.f.]|dharnī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] mē̃[postp.] bhī[p.] bhāvnā[n.f.;sg.] achchhā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] . x (do[past-part.f.]|of|key) (adopt[inf.f.]|earth) in too feeling achcha be[pres.sg.23] .

593The land of Nepal also has good bhavna.

390और दूसरी विशेषता देखी है कि ज्यादा बातों में कम जाते हैं , अपने में मस्त रहते हैं . aur dūsrī viśhēṣhtā dēkhī hai ki jyādā bātō̃ mē̃ cum|kam jātē haĩ , apnē mē̃ mast rahtē haĩ . aur dūsrā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] viśhēṣhtā[n.f.;sg.] dēkhnā[pres-perf.sg.f.23] ki[conj.] jyādā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] bāt[n.f.+ō̃;pl.o.] mē̃[postp.] cum|kam[adj.] jānā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] , apnā[pn.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] mē̃[postp.] mast[adj.] rahnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] . and other speciality see[pres-perf.sg.f.23] that more matter in (x|less) go[pres.pl.m.12hon3] , one’s own in intoxicated remain[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

594And your second speciality seen is that you do not get involved in too many other things. 595You remain busy with yourself.

391खिटखिट कम करते हैं . khiṭkhiṭ cum|kam kartē haĩ . khiṭ-khiṭ cum|kam[adj.] karnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] . complication (x|less) do[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

596You do not create much conflict.

392इसीलिये वृद्धि भी अच्छी हो रही है और क्वालिटी भी अच्छी है . isīliyē vr̥iddhi bhī achchhī hō rahī hai aur quality bhī achchhī hai . isliē vr̥iddhi[n.f.;sg.] bhī[p.] achchhā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] hōnā[pres.sg.f.prog.23] aur quality bhī[p.] achchhā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] . therefore growth too achcha be[pres.sg.f.prog.23] and x too achcha be[pres.sg.23] .

597This is why there is very good expansion and why the quality is also good.

393बहुत अच्छी नहीं कहेंगे लेकिन अच्छी है . bahut achchhī nahī̃ kahē̃gē lēkin achchhī hai . bahut achchhā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] nahī̃[neg] kahnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] lēkin achchhā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] . very achcha not say[fut.m.pl.12hon3] but achcha be[pres.sg.23] .

598One would not say that it is very good, but that it is good.

394नेपाल वालों ने भी माइक नहीं तैयार किया है . nēpāl vālō̃ nē bhī mike nahī̃ taiyār kiyā hai . nēpāl[n.m.;sg.,d.] vālā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] nē[postp.] bhī[p.] mike nahī̃[neg] taiyār[adj.] karnā[pres-perf.sg.m.23] . x those who ∅ too mike not x do[pres-perf.sg.m.23] .

599Those from Nepal also have not created a "mike".

395सहयोगी हैं , समय पर सहयोग दे देते हैं लेकिन समीप ­ सम्बन्ध में लाने से बुलन्द आवाज होगा . sahyōgī haĩ , samay par sahyōg dē dētē haĩ lēkin samīp ­ sambandh mē̃ lānē sē buland āvāj hōgā . sahyōgī[adj.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] , samay[n.m.;sg.,d.] par[postp.]|par[adj.] sahyōg[n.m.;sg.,d.] dēnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3.root+dēnā] lēkin samīp[adj.] ­ sambandh[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] lānā[inf.m.pl.,o.] sē[postp.] buland[adj.] āvāz[n.f.;sg.] hōnā[fut.m.sg.23] . co-operative be[pres.pl.12hon3] , time (at|other) cooperation give[pres.pl.m.12hon3.root+dēnā] but close ­ relationship in x[inf.m.pl.,o.] from x noise be[fut.m.sg.23] .

600There are co­operative souls who give their co­operation when needed, but bring them into close relationship and the sound will spread very loudly and very far.

396अभी छोटा ­ सा आवाज होता है तो सिर्फ नेपाल में ही फैलता है , बस . abhī chhōṭā ­ sā āvāj hōtā hai tō sirph nēpāl mē̃ hī phailtā hai , bas . ab[adv.hī] chhōṭā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] ­ sā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] āvāz[n.f.;sg.] hōnā[pres.sg.m.23] tō sirph[adj.] nēpāl[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] hī[p.] phailnā[pres.sg.m.23] , basnā[root]|bas . now small ­ x noise be[pres.sg.m.23] then only x in only spread[pres.sg.m.23] , (x[root]|simply) .

601Now, the sound created is very soft. 602And so it only spreads as far as Nepal itself. 603That is all.

397बुलन्द आवाज करने वाले तैयार करो . buland āvāj karnē vālē taiyār karō . buland[adj.] āvāz[n.f.;sg.] karnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] taiyār[adj.] karnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] . x noise do[inf.m.pl.,o.] those who x do[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

604Now prepare those who can spread the sound far and loudly.

398अगर हर स्टेट के माइक दो ­ तीन , दो ­ तीन भी तैयार हो जायें तो क्या रौनक नहीं होगी  ? agar har|her state kē|K mike dō ­ tīn , dō ­ tīn bhī taiyār hō jāyē̃ tō kyā raunak nahī̃ hōgī  ? agar har|harnā[root]|her state kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K mike dō[adj.]|dēnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] ­ tīn[adj.] , dō[adj.]|dēnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] ­ tīn[adj.] bhī[p.] taiyār[adj.] hōnā[opt.pl.12hon3.root+jānā] tō kyā raunak[n.f.;sg.] nahī̃[neg] hōnā[fut.f.sg.23]  ? if (x|x[root]) x (of|K) mike (two|give[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2]) ­ x , (two|give[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2]) ­ x too x be[opt.pl.12hon3.root+jānā] then what splendour not be[fut.f.sg.23]  ?

605If each state prepares two to three "mikes", then there would be such splendour. 606There would be this splendour, would there not?

399फिर आप लोगों को सेवा करने की मेहनत नहीं करनी पड़ेगी . phir āp lōgō̃ kō sēvā karnē kī|key mēhnat nahī̃ karnī paṛēgī . phirnā[root]|phir[adv.] āp[pn.pl.] log[n.m.+ō̃;pl.o.] kō[postp.] sēvā[n.f.;sg.] karnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] karnā[past-part.f.]|kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|key mēhnat[n.f.;sg.] nahī̃[neg] karnā[fut.f.sg.23.oblig2] . (turn[root]|then) you people to service do[inf.m.pl.,o.] (do[past-part.f.]|of|key) effort not do[fut.f.sg.23.oblig2] .

607Then you would not have to make any effort to do service.

400आप लाइट हो जायेंगे , वो माइक हो जायेंगे . āp light hō jāyēṅgē , vō mike hō jāyēṅgē . āp[pn.pl.] light hōnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3.root+jānā] , vah[pn.;d.] mike hōnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3.root+jānā] . you light be[fut.m.pl.12hon3.root+jānā] , that mike be[fut.m.pl.12hon3.root+jānā] .

608You will become the might and they will become the "mike".

401आप सिर्फ लाइट देते रहेंगे . āp sirph light dētē rahē̃gē . āp[pn.pl.] sirph[adj.] light dēnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3.pres-part+rahnā] . you only light give[fut.m.pl.12hon3.pres-part+rahnā] .

609You will simply continue to give them might.

402अभी लाइट भी देते हो तो माइक भी बनते हो . abhī light bhī dētē hō tō mike bhī bantē hō . ab[adv.hī] light bhī[p.] dēnā[pres.pl.m.2] tō mike bhī[p.] bannā[pres.pl.m.2] . now light too give[pres.pl.m.2] then mike too become[pres.pl.m.2] .

610At present, you give them light and you also become the "mikes".

403फिर माइक वो बनेंगे और आप लाइट देते रहेंगे . phir mike vō banē̃gē aur āp light dētē rahē̃gē . phirnā[root]|phir[adv.] mike vah[pn.;d.] bannā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] aur āp[pn.pl.] light dēnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3.pres-part+rahnā] . (turn[root]|then) mike that become[fut.m.pl.12hon3] and you light give[fut.m.pl.12hon3.pres-part+rahnā] .

611Then, they will become the "mikes" and you will continue to give light.

404तो सेवा में नया मोड़ लाओ . tō sēvā mē̃ nayā mōṛ lāō . tō sēvā[n.f.;sg.] mē̃[postp.] nayā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] mōṛnā[root] lānā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] . then service in new change[root] x[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

612So, now bring about a new turn in service.

405नवीनता लाओ . navīntā lāō . navīntā[n.f.;sg.] lānā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] . newness x[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

613Bring some newness.

406इसके लिये ये प्रोग्राम रखा है ना कि विदेश से भी हर देश से आवें , यहाँ के भी हर स्टेट से आवें . iskē liyē yē programme rakhā hai nā ki vidēśh sē bhī har|her dēśh sē āvē̃ , yahā̃ kē|K bhī har|her state sē āvē̃ . yah[pn.sg.kē] lēnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.] yah[pn.pl.d.] programme rakhnā[pres-perf.sg.m.23] nā ki[conj.] vidēśh[n.m.;sg.,d.] sē[postp.] bhī[p.] har|harnā[root]|her dēśh[n.m.;sg.,d.] sē[postp.] ānā[opt.pl.12hon3] , yahā̃ kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K bhī[p.] har|harnā[root]|her state sē[postp.] ānā[opt.pl.12hon3] . this[.kē] take[past-part.m.pl.,o.] this programme keep[pres-perf.sg.m.23] ∅ that abroad from too (x|x[root]) land from come[opt.pl.12hon3] , here (of|K) too (x|x[root]) x from come[opt.pl.12hon3] .

614This programme has been created for this, so that even from the foreign lands, someone from every country should come and from here also, someone should come from every state.

407लेकिन माइक तैयार करो तो माइक की दरबार हो जायेगी . lēkin mike taiyār karō tō mike kī|key darbār hō jāyēgī . lēkin mike taiyār[adj.] karnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] tō mike karnā[past-part.f.]|kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|key darbār[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[fut.f.sg.23.root+jānā] . but mike x do[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] then mike (do[past-part.f.]|of|key) court be[fut.f.sg.23.root+jānā] . 408और इतने माइक इकट्ठेहो जायेंगे तो आवाज भी बुलन्द होगा . aur itnē mike ikaṭṭhēhō jāyēṅgē tō āvāj bhī buland hōgā . aur itnā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] mike x jānā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] tō āvāz[n.f.;sg.] bhī[p.] buland[adj.] hōnā[fut.m.sg.23] . and such mike x go[fut.m.pl.12hon3] then noise too x be[fut.m.sg.23] .

615But prepare the "mikes". 616So there will then be a court of the "mikes", and when so many "mikes" gather together, the sound will also spread very far and loudly.

409तो ऐसे नवीनता का प्रोग्राम करो . tō aisē navīntā kā programme karō . tō aisā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] navīntā[n.f.;sg.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] programme karnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] . then such newness of programme do[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

617So create a programme of such newness. 618Until then, prepare the "mikes".

410अभी माइक तैयार करके फिर डेट फिक्स करो . abhī mike taiyār karkē phir date fix karō . ab[adv.hī] mike taiyār[adj.] karnā[abs.] phirnā[root]|phir[adv.] date fix[x] karnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] . now mike x do[abs.] (turn[root]|then) fix a date do[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

619Prepare them and then fix a date. 620However, no corner or state should be left out.

411लेकिन कोई भी कोना , कोई भी स्टेट रहनी नहीं चाहिये . lēkin kōī bhī kōnā , kōī bhī state rahnī nahī̃ chāhiyē . lēkin kōī bhī[x] kōnā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] , kōī bhī[x] state rahnā[inf.f.] nahī̃[neg] chāhiē . but anyone corner , anyone x remain[inf.f.] not should .

621If you have to create a loud sound, what do you do? 622You put up speakers in all four directions, do you not?

412अगर कहाँ भी आवाज बुलन्द करना होता है तो चारों ओर माइक लगाते हो ना , चारों ओर माइक लगने से आवाज बड़ा हो जाता है . agar kahā̃ bhī āvāj buland karnā hōtā hai tō chārō̃ ōr mike lagātē hō nā , chārō̃ ōr mike lagnē sē āvāj baṛā hō jātā hai . agar kahā̃ bhī[p.] āvāz[n.f.;sg.] buland[adj.] karnā[pres.sg.m.23.oblig1] tō chārō̃ ōr[x] mike lagānā[pres.pl.m.2] nā , chārō̃ ōr[x] mike lagnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] sē[postp.] āvāz[n.f.;sg.] baṛā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.m.23.root+jānā] . if where too noise x do[pres.sg.m.23.oblig1] then everywhere mike attach[pres.pl.m.2] ∅ , everywhere mike x[inf.m.pl.,o.] from noise very be[pres.sg.m.23.root+jānā] .

623By speakers being put up in all four directions, the sound becomes very loud. 624All the "mikes" should speak the same sound and so the same sound would emerge from all four directions.

413सभी माइक एक ही आवाज बोलें तो चारों ओर से एक ही आवाज निकलेगा-यही प्रत्यक्षता का झण्डा है . sabhī mike ēk hī āvāj bōlē̃ tō chārō̃ ōr sē ēk hī āvāj nikalēgā-yahī pratyakṣhatā kā jhaṇḍā hai . sab[adv.hī] mike ēk[adj.] hī[p.] āvāz[n.f.;sg.] bōlnā[opt.pl.12hon3] tō chārō̃ ōr[x] sē[postp.] ēk[adj.] hī[p.] āvāz[n.f.;sg.] x pratyakṣhatā[n.f.;sg.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] jhaṇḍā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] . all mike one only noise speak[opt.pl.12hon3] then everywhere from one only noise x revelation of flag be[pres.sg.23] .

625This is the flag of revelation. 626So make these preparations now. 627Do you understand? 628Those from the zones should not simply become happy that they have received this blessing.

414तो अभी तैयारी करो . tō abhī taiyārī karō . tō ab[adv.hī] taiyārī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] karnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] . then now x do[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

629Go and do service.

415तो सभी जोन वाले सिर्फ इसमें खुश नहीं होना कि हमको भी वरदान मिला लेकिन जाकर सेवा करना . tō sabhī zone vālē sirph ismē̃ khuśh nahī̃ hōnā ki hamkō bhī vardān milā lēkin jākar sēvā karnā . tō sab[adv.hī] zone vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] sirph[adj.] yah[pn.sg.mē̃] khuśh[adj.] nahī̃[neg] hōnā[inf.m.sg.d.] ki[conj.] ham[pn.pl.kō] bhī[p.] vardān[n.m.;sg.,d.] milānā[root]|milnā[past-part.m.sg.d.] lēkin jānā[abs.] sēvā[n.f.;sg.] karnā[inf.m.sg.d.] . then all zone those who only this[.mē̃] happy not be[inf.m.sg.d.] that we[.kō] too blessing (x[root]|receive[past-part.m.sg.d.]) but go[abs.] service do[inf.m.sg.d.] .

630Baba is not mentioning any names, but each of you should consider yourself for this. 631Those from Delhi and Bombay have to do this first.

416देहली वालों को पहले करना है . dēhlī vālō̃ kō pahlē karnā hai . dēhlī vālā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] kō[postp.] pahlā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|pahlē[adv.] karnā[pres.sg.23.oblig1] . Delhi those who to (x|firstly) do[pres.sg.23.oblig1] .

632Delhi and Bombay are both those who glorify the name.

417देहली , बाम्बे दोनों ही नाम बाला करने वाले हैं . dēhlī , bāmbē dōnō̃ hī nām bālā karnē vālē haĩ . dēhlī , bāmbē dōnō̃ hī[p.] nām[n.m.;sg.,d.] bālā[x] karnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] . Delhi , Bombay x only name x do[inf.m.pl.,o.] those who be[pres.pl.12hon3] .

633Is this correct, those from Delhi? 634It is good. 635The instrument of Delhi is sitting here.

418तो ऐसी कमाल करो जो सबके मुख से यही निकले कि सचमुच परिवर्तक आप ही हो . tō aisī kamāl karō jō sabkē mukh sē yahī nikalē ki sachmuch parivartak āp hī hō . tō aisā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] kamāl[n.m.;sg.,d.] karnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] jō[pn.;d.] sabkā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] mukh[n.m.;sg.,d.] sē[postp.] yahī[pn.;d.] nikalnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|nikalnā[opt.sg.23] ki[conj.] sachmuch parivartak[adj.] āp[pn.pl.] hī[p.] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] . then such x do[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] that everyone's mouth from this (be extracted[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|be extracted[opt.sg.23]) that x transformer you only (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) .

636(Jagdishbhai was sitting in front of Baba). 637It would be a wonder when it emerges from everyone's lips that you are truly the only transformers.

419ये भी हैं , नहीं , ये ही हैं . yē bhī haĩ , nahī̃ , yē hī haĩ . yah[pn.pl.d.] bhī[p.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] , nahī̃[neg] , yah[pn.pl.d.] hī[p.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] . this too be[pres.pl.12hon3] , not , this only be[pres.pl.12hon3] .

638They should not say that you are also one of them, but that you are the only ones.

420अभी कहते हैं ये भी हैं , वो भी हैं , ये भी अच्छे हैं . abhī kahtē haĩ yē bhī haĩ , vō bhī haĩ , yē bhī achchhē haĩ . ab[adv.hī] kahnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] yah[pn.pl.d.] bhī[p.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] , vah[pn.;d.] bhī[p.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] , yah[pn.pl.d.] bhī[p.] achchhā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] . now say[pres.pl.m.12hon3] this too be[pres.pl.12hon3] , that too be[pres.pl.12hon3] , this too achcha be[pres.pl.12hon3] .

639What do they say at present? 640That you are also one of many; that you too are good.

421ये ही अच्छे हैं-जब ये आवाज निकले तब झण्डा लहरायेगा . yē hī achchhē haĩ-jab yē āvāj nikalē tab jhaṇḍā laharāyēgā . yah[pn.pl.d.] hī[p.] achchhā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] x yah[pn.pl.d.] āvāz[n.f.;sg.] nikalnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|nikalnā[opt.sg.23] tab jhaṇḍā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] laharānā[fut.m.sg.23] . this only achcha x this noise (be extracted[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|be extracted[opt.sg.23]) for only then flag hoist[fut.m.sg.23] .

641When the sound emerges that only these people are good, then the flag will be hoisted.

422अनेक हैं , नहीं . anēk haĩ , nahī̃ . anēk[adj.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] , nahī̃[neg] . many be[pres.pl.12hon3] , not . 423एक हैं . ēk haĩ . ēk[adj.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] . one be[pres.pl.12hon3] .

642You are the only one, there are not many.

424तो सभी जोन वाले ऐसा करने के लिए तैयार हो ना  ? tō sabhī zone vālē aisā karnē kē liē taiyār hō nā  ? tō sab[adv.hī] zone vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] aisā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] karnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] kē liē[x] taiyār[adj.] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] nā  ? then all zone those who such do[inf.m.pl.,o.] for x (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) ∅  ?

643So all of you from all the zones are ready, are you not? 644Are you ready to do this?

425कोई मन्सा सेवा करो , कोई वाचा करो . kōī mansā sēvā karō , kōī vāchā karō . kōī[pn.;d.] mansā sēvā[n.f.;sg.] karnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] , kōī[pn.;d.] vāchā karnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] . some through the mind service do[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] , some x do[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] . 426मन्सा सेवा तो सभी कर सकते हो ना  ? mansā sēvā tō sabhī kar saktē hō nā  ? mansā sēvā[n.f.;sg.] tō sab[adv.hī] karnā[pres.pl.m.2.root+saknā] nā  ? through the mind service then all do[pres.pl.m.2.root+saknā] ∅  ?

645All of you will do this, will you not? 646Some of you can do service through the mind and some of you can do service through words. 647Everyone can do service through the mind.

427तो वायब्रेशन फैलाओ . tō vibration phailāō . tō vibration phailānā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] . then vibrations spread[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

648Therefore, spread those vibrations.

428वाणी से नहीं तो मंसा से योगदान दो . vāṇī sē nahī̃ tō mansā sē yōgdān dō . vāṇī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] sē[postp.] nahī̃ tō[x] mansā sē[postp.] yōgdān[n.m.;sg.,d.] dō[adj.]|dēnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] . words from otherwise through the mind from donation of yoga (two|give[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2]) .

649If not through words, then give the donation of yoga through your mind.

429सबकी अंगुली चाहिये . sabkī aṅgulī chāhiyē . sabkā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] aṅgulī, uṅglī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] chāhiē . everyone's finger should .

650Everyone's finger is needed.

430समझा  ? samjhā  ? samjhānā[root]|samajhnā[past-part.m.sg.d.]  ? (explain[root]|understand[past-part.m.sg.d.])  ?

651Do you understand?

431अच्छा . achchhā . achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] . achcha .

652Achcha.

432डबल विदेशी - डबल विदेशी अर्थात् दूरदेशी और दूरांदेशी . double vidēśhī - double vidēśhī arthāt dūrdēśhī aur dūrāndēśhī . double vidēśhī[n.m.;sg.,d.] - double vidēśhī[n.m.;sg.,d.] arthāt dūrdēśhī[n.m.;sg.,d.] aur dūrādēśhī[adj.] . double foreigner - double foreigner that is Resident of the far-away land and far-sighted .

653Double foreigners:Double foreigners have also taken a chance in every group. 654Not a single group has been without double foreigners.

433भारत में जो मैसेज देने वाले होते हैं उनको दरवेश भी कहते हैं . bhārat mē̃ jō message dēnē vālē hōtē haĩ unkō daravēś bhī kahtē haĩ . bhārat[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] jō[pn.;d.] message dēnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] hōnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] vah[pn.pl.kō] x bhī[p.] kahnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] . Bharat in that message give[inf.m.pl.,o.] those who be[pres.pl.m.12hon3] that[.kō] x too say[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

655They are present in all the groups. 656It is good. 657BapDada is pleased. 658At least every group becomes an international group.

434तो डबल विदेशी दूरांदेश बुद्धि वाले अच्छे हैं . tō double vidēśhī dūrāndēśh buddhi vālē achchhē haĩ . tō double vidēśhī[n.m.;sg.,d.] dūrādēśhī[adj.] buddhi[n.f.;sg.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] achchhā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] . then double foreigner far-sighted intellect those who achcha be[pres.pl.12hon3] .

659To be a foreigner means to be a resident of the far­away land and also far­sighted.

435दूरांदेश बुद्धि अर्थात् हर परिस्थिति , हर बात को आदि ­ मध्य ­ अन्त तीनों कालों से जानने और देखने वाले . dūrāndēśh buddhi arthāt har|her paristhiti , har|her bāt kō ādi ­ madhya ­ ant tīnō̃ kālō̃ sē jānnē aur dēkhnē vālē . dūrādēśhī[adj.] buddhi[n.f.;sg.] arthāt har|harnā[root]|her paristhiti[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] , har|harnā[root]|her bāt[n.f.;sg.] kō[postp.] ādi[adj.] ­ madhya[n.m.;sg.,d.] ­ ant[n.m.;sg.,d.] tīnō̃[adj.] kālā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.]|kāl[n.m.+ō̃;pl.o.] sē[postp.] jānnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] aur dēkhnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] . far-sighted intellect that is (x|x[root]) circumstances , (x|x[root]) matter to etc. ­ middle ­ end all three (ugly|x) from know[inf.m.pl.,o.] and see[inf.m.pl.,o.] those who . 436जिसको दूसरे शब्दों में कहेंगेत्रिकालदर्शी . jiskō dūsrē śhabdō̃ mē̃ kahēṅgētrikāladarśī . jō[pn.sg.kō] dūsrā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] śhabd[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] x . that[.kō] other word in x .

660In Bharat, those who carry a message are called inland messengers. 661The double foreigners are good in having a far­ sighted intellect. 662To have a far­sighted intellect means to know and see every situation in the three aspects of times: its beginning, its middle and its end.

437तो जो भी कार्य करेंत्रिकालदर्शी होकर करें . tō jō bhī kārya karēntrikāladarśī hōkar karē̃ . tō jō[pn.;d.] bhī[p.] kārya[n.m.;sg.,d.] x hōnā[abs.] karnā[opt.pl.12hon3] . then that too task x be[abs.] do[opt.pl.12hon3] .

663In other words, you would call them trikaldarshi. 664Whatever task you perform, do it whilst being trikaldarshi.

438एक काल नहीं देखें . ēk kāl nahī̃ dēkhē̃ . ēk[adj.] kal nahī̃[neg] dēkhnā[opt.pl.12hon3] . one x not see[opt.pl.12hon3] .

665Do not just see one aspect of time.

439तीनों ही कालों को जानने , समझने और समझकर चलने वाले . tīnō̃ hī kālō̃ kō jānnē , samajhnē aur samajhkar chalnē vālē . tīnō̃[adj.] hī[p.] kālā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.]|kāl[n.m.+ō̃;pl.o.] kō[postp.] jānnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] , samajhnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] aur samajhnā[abs.] chalnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] . all three only (ugly|x) to know[inf.m.pl.,o.] , understand[inf.m.pl.,o.] and understand[abs.] continue[inf.m.pl.,o.] those who .

666You are those who know, understand and move along according to the understanding of the three aspects of time.

440इसको कहते हैं दूरांदेश बुद्धि , दूरांदेशी दृष्टि . iskō kahtē haĩ dūrāndēśh buddhi , dūrāndēśhī dr̥iṣhṭi . yah[pn.sg.kō] kahnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] dūrādēśhī[adj.] buddhi[n.f.;sg.] , dūrādēśhī[adj.] dr̥iṣhṭi[n.f.;sg.] . this[.kō] say[pres.pl.m.12hon3] far-sighted intellect , far-sighted drishti .

667This is known as having a far­sighted intellect and far­sighted vision.

441तो जो तीनों काल को जानकर करते हैं वो कभी भी भटकेंगे नहीं . tō jō tīnō̃ kāl kō jānkar kartē haĩ vō kabhī bhī bhaṭakē̃gē nahī̃ . tō jō[pn.;d.] tīnō̃[adj.] kal kō[postp.] jānnā[abs.] karnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] vah[pn.;d.] kabhī[adv.] bhī[p.] bhaṭaknā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] nahī̃[neg] . then that all three x to know[abs.] do[pres.pl.m.12hon3] that ever too wander around[fut.m.pl.12hon3] not .

668Those who do everything whilst knowing the three aspects of time never wander or stumble around.

442तीनों कालों को जानकर करने वाले सदा ही विजयी होंगे . tīnō̃ kālō̃ kō jānkar karnē vālē sadā hī vijayī hōṅgē . tīnō̃[adj.] kālā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.]|kāl[n.m.+ō̃;pl.o.] kō[postp.] jānnā[abs.] karnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] sadā hī[p.] vijayī[adj.] hōnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] . all three (ugly|x) to know[abs.] do[inf.m.pl.,o.] those who constantly only victorious be[fut.m.pl.12hon3] .

669Those who do everything whilst knowing the three aspects of time are constantly victorious.

443सहज विजयी . sahaj vijayī . sahaj[adj.] vijayī[adj.] . easy victorious . 444मेहनत के बाद विजयी नहीं . mēhnat kē bād vijayī nahī̃ . mēhnat[n.f.;sg.] kē bād[x] vijayī[adj.] nahī̃[neg] . effort after victorious not .

670They are easily victorious; not those who are victorious after having to labour.

445मेहनत करके विजय प्राप्त होती है तो मेहनत में आधा मौज तो खत्म हो जाती है . mēhnat karkē vijay prāpt hōtī hai tō mēhnat mē̃ ādhā mauj tō khatm hō jātī hai . mēhnat[n.f.;sg.] karnā[abs.] vijay[n.m.;sg.,d.] prāpt[adj.] hōnā[pres.sg.f.23] tō mēhnat[n.f.;sg.] mē̃[postp.] ādhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] mauj[n.f.;sg.] tō ḵẖatm[adj.] hōnā[pres.sg.f.23.root+jānā] . effort do[abs.] victory reached be[pres.sg.f.23] then effort in half pleasure then finished be[pres.sg.f.23.root+jānā] .

671When you attain victory after having to labour, half the pleasure is lost in having to make effort.

446और जो सहज विजय होती है उसमें नशा , खुशी , मौज-सब होती है . aur jō sahaj vijay hōtī hai usmē̃ naśhā , khuśhī , mauj-sab hōtī hai . aur jō[pn.;d.] sahaj[adj.] vijay[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.f.23] vah[pn.sg.mē̃] naśhā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] , khuśhī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] , x hōnā[pres.sg.f.23] . and that easy victory be[pres.sg.f.23] that[.mē̃] intoxication , happiness , x be[pres.sg.f.23] .

672And when you attain victory easily, then you have intoxication, happiness and pleasure in that. 673So what are the double foreigners?

447तो डबल विदेशीत्रिकालदर्शी हो  ? tō double vidēśītrikāladarśī hō  ? tō double x hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2]  ? then double x (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2])  ?

674Are you trikaldarshi? 675Or those who only know one aspect of time?

448कि एकदर्शी हो  ? ki ēkadarśī hō  ? ki[conj.] x hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2]  ? that x (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2])  ?

676What are you? 677Are you trikaldarshi?

449जल्दी ­ जल्दी में एक काल देखकर तो नहीं कर लेते  ? jaldī ­ jaldī mē̃ ēk kāl dēkhkar tō nahī̃ kar lētē  ? jaldī ­ jaldī mē̃[postp.] ēk[adj.] kal dēkhnā[abs.] tō nahī̃[neg] karnā[root] lēnā[pres-part.m.pl.,o.]  ? very quickly ­ very quickly in one x see[abs.] then not do[root] take[pres-part.m.pl.,o.]  ?

678You do not do everything hurriedly only seeing one aspect of time, do you?

450त्रिकालदर्शी अर्थात्सोच ­ समझ कर कार्य करने वाले . trikāldarśhī arthātsōc ­ samajh kar kārya karnē vālē . trikāldarśhī[adj.] x ­ samajh[n.f.;sg.]|samajhnā[root] karnā[root] kārya[n.m.;sg.,d.] karnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] . trikaldarshi x ­ (understanding|understand[root]) do[root] task do[inf.m.pl.,o.] those who .

679This is known as those who do everything after thinking and carefully considering everything.

451जल्दी ­ जल्दी में सिर्फ वर्तमान देखकर कर लिया तो धोखा खा लेते हैं . jaldī ­ jaldī mē̃ sirph vartamān dēkhkar kar liyā tō dhōkhā khā lētē haĩ . jaldī ­ jaldī mē̃[postp.] sirph[adj.] vartamān[adj.] dēkhnā[abs.] karnā[past-part.m.sg.d..root+lēnā] tō dhōkhā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] khānā[pres.pl.m.12hon3.root+lēnā] . very quickly ­ very quickly in only present see[abs.] do[past-part.m.sg.d..root+lēnā] then deception eat[pres.pl.m.12hon3.root+lēnā] .

680If you do every thing hurriedly whilst only seeing the present time, then you would be deceived.

452लेकिन त्रिकालदर्शीबनकर कार्य करते तो सदा सफलता सहज मिलती है . lēkin trikāladarśībanakar kārya kartē tō sadā saphaltā sahaj miltī hai . lēkin x kārya[n.m.;sg.,d.] karnā[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] tō sadā saphaltā[n.f.;sg.] sahaj[adj.] milnā[pres.sg.f.23] . but x task do[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] then constantly success easy receive[pres.sg.f.23] .

681If you do everything whilst being trikaldarshi, then you receive success easily.

453तो सहज सफलता प्राप्त करने वाले त्रिकालदर्शीअर्थात् दूरांदेशी बुद्धि वाले . tō sahaj saphaltā prāpt karnē vālē trikāladarśīarthāt dūrāndēśhī buddhi vālē . tō sahaj[adj.] saphaltā[n.f.;sg.] prāpt[adj.] karnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] x dūrādēśhī[adj.] buddhi[n.f.;sg.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] . then easy success reached do[inf.m.pl.,o.] those who x far-sighted intellect those who . 454समझा . samjhā . samjhānā[root]|samajhnā[past-part.m.sg.d.] . (explain[root]|understand[past-part.m.sg.d.]) .

682You are trikaldarshi souls who easily attain success, that is, those who have a far­sighted intellect. 683Do you understand who you are?

455मधुबन निवासी - ( बापदादा ने आबू के भिन्नभिन्नस्थानों पर सेवा में उपस्थित भाई ­ बहिनों से हाथ उठवाया ) देखो , पीस पार्क भी कम नहीं है . madhuban nivāsī - ( bāpdādā nē ābū kē|K bhinnabhinnasthānō̃ par sēvā mē̃ upasthit bhāī ­ bahinō̃ sē hāth uṭhvāyā ) dēkhō , peace park bhī cum|kam nahī̃ hai . madhuban[n.m.;sg.,d.] nivāsī[n.m.;sg.,d.] - ( bāpdādā nē[postp.] ābū kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K x par[postp.]|par[adj.] sēvā[n.f.;sg.] mē̃[postp.] upasthit[adj.] bhāī[n.m.;sg.,d.]|bhānā[past-part.f.] ­ bahan ou bahin[n.f.+ō̃;pl.o.] sē[postp.] hāth[n.m.;sg.,d.] uṭhvānā[past-part.m.sg.d.] ) dēkhnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] , Peace park[x] bhī[p.] cum|kam[adj.] nahī̃[neg] hōnā[pres.sg.23] . Madhuban resident - ( BapDada ∅ Abu (of|K) x (at|other) service in x (brother|be liked[past-part.f.]) ­ x from hand make raise[past-part.m.sg.d.] ) see[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] , x too (x|less) not be[pres.sg.23] .

684Madhuban Niwasis:Are all of you Madhuban niwasis? 685Are those in Talheti Madhuban niwasis? 686Those from Talheti, raise your hands. 687Achcha, those from Madhuban, raise your hands.

456लण्डन अमेरिका सबको भूल जाता है . london America sabkō bhūl jātā hai . London America sabkō bhūl jānā[pres.sg.m.23] . x America everything x[pres.sg.m.23] .

688Those from the Hospital, raise your hands.

457जो पीस पार्क देखते हैं तो कॉपी करने की कोशिश करते हैं . jō peace park dēkhtē haĩ tō copy karnē kī|key kōśhiśh kartē haĩ . jō[pn.;d.] Peace park[x] dēkhnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] tō copy karnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] karnā[past-part.f.]|kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|key kōśhiśh[n.f.;sg.] karnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] . that x see[pres.pl.m.12hon3] then copy do[inf.m.pl.,o.] (do[past-part.f.]|of|key) try do[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

689Achcha, Those from Gyan Sarovar, raise your hands. 690There are a lot more from Gyan Sarovar. 691Achcha.

458लेकिन कितनी भी कॉपी करें , रूहानियत की झलक तो आ नहीं सकती , प्यार की झलक तो आ नहीं सकती . lēkin kitnī bhī copy karē̃ , rūhāniyat kī|key jhalak tō ā nahī̃ saktī , pyār kī|key jhalak tō ā nahī̃ saktī . lēkin kitnā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] bhī[p.] copy karnā[opt.pl.12hon3] , rūḥānīyat[n.f.;sg.] karnā[past-part.f.]|kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|key jhalaknā[root]|jhalak[n.f.;sg.] tō ānā[root] nahī̃[neg] saknā[pres-part.f.] , pyār[n.m.;sg.,d.] karnā[past-part.f.]|kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|key jhalaknā[root]|jhalak[n.f.;sg.] tō ānā[root] nahī̃[neg] saknā[pres-part.f.] . but so too copy do[opt.pl.12hon3] , x (do[past-part.f.]|of|key) (sparkle[root]|x) then come[root] not can[pres-part.f.] , love (do[past-part.f.]|of|key) (sparkle[root]|x) then come[root] not can[pres-part.f.] .

692Sevadharis in Madhuban, raise your hands. 693To be a sevadhari means to be fortunate. 694Achcha. 695Those from the Peace Park, raise your hands.

459तो मेहनत का फल मिल रहा है . tō mēhnat kā phal mil rahā hai . tō mēhnat[n.f.;sg.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] phal[n.m.;sg.,d.] milnā[pres.sg.m.prog.23] . then effort of fruit receive[pres.sg.m.prog.23] .

696(Kishorbhai's family). 697They are a trimurti.

460मेहनत तो अच्छी की है . mēhnat tō achchhī kī hai . mēhnat[n.f.;sg.] tō achchhā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] karnā[pres-perf.sg.f.23] . effort then achcha do[pres-perf.sg.f.23] .

698It is good. 699Peace Park is no less.

461प्यार से मेहनत की है ना . pyār sē mēhnat kī hai nā . pyār[n.m.;sg.,d.] sē[postp.] mēhnat[n.f.;sg.] karnā[pres-perf.sg.f.23] nā . love from effort do[pres-perf.sg.f.23] ∅ .

700Everyone forgets London and America.

462सिर्फ पानी नहीं दिया है लेकिन प्यार का पानी दिया है इसीलिये वायुमण्डल न्यारा और प्यारा है . sirph pānī nahī̃ diyā hai lēkin pyār kā pānī diyā hai isīliyē vāyumaṇḍal nyārā aur pyārā hai . sirph[adj.] pānī[n.m.;sg.,d.]|pānā[inf.f.] nahī̃[neg] dēnā[pres-perf.sg.m.23] lēkin pyār[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] pānī[n.m.;sg.,d.]|pānā[inf.f.] dēnā[pres-perf.sg.m.23] isliē vāyumaṇḍal[n.m.;sg.,d.] nyārā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] aur pyārā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] . only (water|x[inf.f.]) not give[pres-perf.sg.m.23] but love of (water|x[inf.f.]) give[pres-perf.sg.m.23] therefore atmosphere unique and loving be[pres.sg.23] .

701Whoever sees the Peace Park tries to copy it. 702But no matter how much they copy it, they cannot have that sparkle of spirituality. 703They cannot have that sparkle of love.

463औरज्ञान सरोवर वाले भी बहुत प्यार से मेहनत कर रहे हैं . aurajñān sarōvar vālē bhī bahut pyār sē mēhnat kar rahē haĩ . x sarōvar[n.m.;sg.,d.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] bhī[p.] bahut pyār[n.m.;sg.,d.] sē[postp.] mēhnat[n.f.;sg.] karnā[pres.pl.m.prog.12hon3] . x Sarovar those who too very love from effort do[pres.pl.m.prog.12hon3] .

704This is why your speciality is good. 705You are receiving the fruit of your effort.

464अच्छी रिजल्ट है . achchhī result hai . achchhā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] result hōnā[pres.sg.23] . achcha result be[pres.sg.23] .

706You have made a lot of effort.

465और निश्चयबुद्धि सबसे नम्बरवन हैं . aur niśhchaybuddhi sabsē number one haĩ . aur niśhchaybuddhi[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] sabsē number one hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] . and intellect with faith the most number one be[pres.pl.12hon3] .

707You have made effort with a lot of love.

466कितना भी कोई जाकर हिलाता है-नहीं तैयार होगा , नहीं तैयार होगा , जितना वो ना करते हैं उतना ये हाँ करते हैं . kitnā bhī kōī jākar hilātā hai-nahī̃ taiyār hōgā , nahī̃ taiyār hōgā , jitnā vō nā kartē haĩ utnā yē hā̃ kartē haĩ . kitnā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] bhī[p.] kōī[pn.;d.] jānā[abs.] hilānā[pres-part.m.sg.d.] x taiyār[adj.] hōnā[fut.m.sg.23] , nahī̃[neg] taiyār[adj.] hōnā[fut.m.sg.23] , jitnā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] vah[pn.;d.] nā karnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] utnā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] yah[pn.pl.d.] hā̃ karnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] . so too some go[abs.] make fluctuate[pres-part.m.sg.d.] x x be[fut.m.sg.23] , not x be[fut.m.sg.23] , the more that ∅ do[pres.pl.m.12hon3] x this yes do[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

708You have not just watered it, you have given it the water of love and this is why the atmosphere is lovely and unique. 709And those from Gyan Sarovar are also working hard with a lot of love. 710The result is good. 711And you are number one in having faith in the intellect.

467इसलिये निश्चय की विजय होती है . isliyē niśhchay kī vijay hōtī hai . isliē niśhchay karnā[past-part.f.] vijay[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.f.23] . therefore have the faith victory be[pres.sg.f.23] . 468तैयार होना ही है , बाप को आना ही है . taiyār hōnā hī hai , bāp kō ānā hī hai . taiyār[adj.] hōnā[inf.m.sg.d.] hī[p.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] , bāp[n.m.;sg.,d.] kō[postp.] ānā[inf.m.sg.d.]|ānā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] hī[p.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] . x be[inf.m.sg.d.] only be[pres.sg.23] , father to (come[inf.m.sg.d.]|x) only be[pres.sg.23] .

712No matter how much someone tries to shake you, saying: "No, it will not be ready on time", the more they say it won't be ready, the more you say, "Yes, it will be ready".

469इसलिये मुबारक हो निश्चय की . isliyē mubārak hō niśhchay kī . isliē mubārak[n.f.;sg.] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] niśhchay karnā[past-part.f.] . therefore congratulations (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) have the faith .

713Therefore, there is victory when there is faith.

470अच्छा . achchhā . achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] . achcha . 471तलहटी वाले भी मौज में आ गये हैं , मेला मनाने की तैयारी कर रहे हैं . talahṭī vālē bhī mauj mē̃ ā gayē haĩ , mēlā manānē kī|key taiyārī kar rahē haĩ . talahṭī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] bhī[p.] mauj[n.f.;sg.] mē̃[postp.] ānā[pres-perf.pl.m.12hon3.root+jānā] , mēlā[x] manānā[inf.m.pl.,o.] karnā[past-part.f.]|kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|key taiyārī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] karnā[pres.pl.m.prog.12hon3] . x those who too pleasure in come[pres-perf.pl.m.12hon3.root+jānā] , fair celebrate[inf.m.pl.,o.] (do[past-part.f.]|of|key) x do[pres.pl.m.prog.12hon3] .

714It has to be ready and the Father has to come. 715This is why, even when all the Madhuban niwasis and all the parties that come say that it will not be ready, Baba says that He has to come.

472अच्छा है , रौनक तो चाहिये ना . achchhā hai , raunak tō chāhiyē nā . achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] , raunak[n.f.;sg.] tō chāhiē nā . achcha be[pres.sg.23] , splendour then should ∅ .

716Therefore, congratulations for your faith. 717Achcha.

473कोई नवीनता चाहिये ना . kōī navīntā chāhiyē nā . kōī[pn.;d.] navīntā[n.f.;sg.] chāhiē nā . some newness should ∅ .

718Those in Talheti are also experiencing pleasure.

474ओम् शान्ति भवन के हाल में तो सदा बैठते ही हो . ōm śhānti bhavan kē|K hāl|hall mē̃ tō sadā baiṭhtē hī hō . ōm śhānti[x] bhavan[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K hāl[n.m.;sg.,d.]|hall mē̃[postp.] tō sadā baiṭhnā[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] hī[p.] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] . Om Shanti Bhavan (of|K) (x|hall) in then constantly sit[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] only (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) .

719You are making the preparations for celebrating at the mela. 720It is good.

475लेकिन नवीनता भी चाहिये ना . lēkin navīntā bhī chāhiyē nā . lēkin navīntā[n.f.;sg.] bhī[p.] chāhiē nā . but newness too should ∅ .

721There has to be sparkle and splendour.

476और कितनी आत्माओं का संकल्प पूरा हो जायेगा . aur kitnī ātmāō̃ kā saṅkalp pūrā hō jāyēgā . aur kitnā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] ātmā[n.f.+ō̃;pl.o.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] saṅkalp[n.m.;sg.,d.] pūrā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[fut.m.sg.23.root+jānā] . and so soul of thought full be[fut.m.sg.23.root+jānā] .

722There has to be some newness. 723You always sit in the Om Shanti Bhavan Hall anyway.

477उल्हने कम हो जायेंगे . ulhanē kam hō jāyēṅgē . x kam hōnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3.root+jānā] . x decrease .

724But there has to be some newness also.

478तो तलहटी में ठीक तैयारी हो रही है  ? tō talahṭī mē̃ ṭhīk taiyārī hō rahī hai  ? tō talahṭī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] mē̃[postp.] ṭhīk[adj.] taiyārī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] hōnā[pres.sg.f.prog.23]  ? then x in OK x be[pres.sg.f.prog.23]  ?

725And the thoughts of so many souls will be fulfilled.

479बड़ी बात तो नहीं लगती  ? baṛī bāt tō nahī̃ lagtī  ? baṛā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] bāt[n.f.;sg.] tō nahī̃[neg] lagnā[pres-part.f.]  ? very matter then not x[pres-part.f.]  ?

726The complaints will be reduced.

480खुशी में मुश्किल भी सहज हो जाती है . khuśhī mē̃ muśhkil bhī sahaj hō jātī hai . khuśhī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] mē̃[postp.] muśhkil[adj.] bhī[p.] sahaj[adj.] hōnā[pres.sg.f.23.root+jānā] . happiness in difficult too easy be[pres.sg.f.23.root+jānā] .

727Are those from Talheti engaged in this? 728Is everything going well?

481अच्छा . achchhā . achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] . achcha .

729Achcha.

482आबू निवासी क्या कर रहे हैं  ? ābū nivāsī kyā kar rahē haĩ  ? ābū nivāsī[n.m.;sg.,d.] kyā karnā[pres.pl.m.prog.12hon3]  ? Abu resident what do[pres.pl.m.prog.12hon3]  ?

730Preparations are being made.

483सहयोग का साथ दे रहे हैं . sahyōg kā sāth dē rahē haĩ . sahyōg[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] sāth[n.m.;sg.,d.] dēnā[pres.pl.m.prog.12hon3] . cooperation of with give[pres.pl.m.prog.12hon3] .

731You do not think it is a big task, do you?

484कभी भी कोई कार्य होता है तो आबू निवासी कार्य कर लेते हैं . kabhī bhī kōī kārya hōtā hai tō ābū nivāsī kārya kar lētē haĩ . kabhī[adv.] bhī[p.] kōī[pn.;d.] kārya[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.m.23] tō ābū nivāsī[n.m.;sg.,d.] kārya[n.m.;sg.,d.] karnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3.root+lēnā] . ever too some task be[pres.sg.m.23] then Abu resident task do[pres.pl.m.12hon3.root+lēnā] .

732It feels easy. 733You have happiness. 734In happiness, even the difficult becomes easy.

485अच्छा है , म्युजियम भी अच्छी सेवा कर रहा है , म्युजियम वाले बच्चे भी मेहनत अच्छी करते हैं . achchhā hai , museum bhī achchhī sēvā kar rahā hai , museum vālē bachchē bhī mēhnat achchhī kartē haĩ . achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] , museum bhī[p.] achchhā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] sēvā[n.f.;sg.] karnā[pres.sg.m.prog.23] , museum vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] bachchā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] bhī[p.] mēhnat[n.f.;sg.] achchhā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] karnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] . achcha be[pres.sg.23] , museum too achcha service do[pres.sg.m.prog.23] , museum those who child too effort achcha do[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

735The museum is also doing good service, and what are the Abu niwasis doing? 736You are giving the company of your co­operation.

486म्युजियम तो चलताफिरता एक सेवा का स्थान है . museum tō calatāphiratā ēk sēvā kā sthān hai . museum tō x ēk[adj.] sēvā[n.f.;sg.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] sthān[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] . museum then x one service of place be[pres.sg.23] .

737Whenever any task is to be accomplished, the Abu niwasis do that.

487इस म्युजियम ने भी वि्ातने सेवाकेन्द्र खोले होंगे . is museum nē bhī viātanē sēvākēndra khōlē hōṅgē . yah[pn.sg.o.] museum nē[postp.] bhī[p.] x sēvākēndra[n.m.;sg.,d.] khōlnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|khōlnā[opt.sg.23] hōnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] . this museum ∅ too x centre (open[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|open[opt.sg.23]) be[fut.m.pl.12hon3] .

738It is good. 739All the children at the museum are also working hard.

488कितनी आत्माओं की धरनी परिवर्तन कर दी है . kitnī ātmāō̃ kī|key dharnī parivartan kar dī hai . kitnā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] ātmā[n.f.+ō̃;pl.o.] karnā[past-part.f.]|kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|key dharnā[inf.f.]|dharnī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] parivartan[n.m.;sg.,d.] karnā[pres-perf.sg.f.23.root+dēnā] . so soul (do[past-part.f.]|of|key) (adopt[inf.f.]|earth) transformation do[pres-perf.sg.f.23.root+dēnā] .

740The museum is a mobile place of service. 741How many centres would this museum have opened?

489यहाँ का प्रभाव वहाँ स्थानों पर भी काम में आता है . yahā̃ kā prabhāv vahā̃ sthānō̃ par bhī kām mē̃ ātā hai . yahā̃ kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] prabhāv[n.m.;sg.,d.] vahā̃ sthān[n.m.+ō̃;pl.o.] par[postp.]|par[adj.] bhī[p.] kām[n.m.;sg.,d.]|kām[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] ānā[pres.sg.m.23] . here of x there place (at|other) too (task|lust) in come[pres.sg.m.23] .

742How many souls were transformed through this? 743The influence created here is very useful when they go back.

490क्योंकि यहाँ आने वाले फ्री होते हैं तो बुद्धिफ्री होने के कारण प्रभाव अच्छा पड़ता है फिर वही वहाँ काम में आता है . kyōṅki yahā̃ ānē vālē free hōtē haĩ tō buddhiphrī hōnē kē|K kāraṇ prabhāv achchhā paṛtā hai phir vahī vahā̃ kām mē̃ ātā hai . kyōṅki yahā̃ ānā[inf.m.pl.,o.]|ānā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] free hōnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] tō x hōnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K kāraṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.] prabhāv[n.m.;sg.,d.] achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] paṛnā[pres.sg.m.23] phirnā[root]|phir[adv.] vahī vahā̃ kām[n.m.;sg.,d.]|kām[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] ānā[pres.sg.m.23] . because here (come[inf.m.pl.,o.]|x) those who free be[pres.pl.m.12hon3] then x be[inf.m.pl.,o.] (of|K) because x achcha fall[pres.sg.m.23] (turn[root]|then) this there (task|lust) in come[pres.sg.m.23] .

744When they are free here, because their intellect is free here, they are very impressed, and so this is what is useful when they get back to their homes. 745So the service of the museum is no less either.

491तो म्युजियम की सेवा भी कम नहीं है . tō museum kī|key sēvā bhī cum|kam nahī̃ hai . tō museum karnā[past-part.f.]|kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|key sēvā[n.f.;sg.] bhī[p.] cum|kam[adj.] nahī̃[neg] hōnā[pres.sg.23] . then museum (do[past-part.f.]|of|key) service too (x|less) not be[pres.sg.23] .

746The service at all the places is good.

492सभी स्थानों की सेवा अच्छी है . sabhī sthānō̃ kī|key sēvā achchhī hai . sab[adv.hī] sthān[n.m.+ō̃;pl.o.] karnā[past-part.f.]|kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|key sēvā[n.f.;sg.] achchhā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] . all place (do[past-part.f.]|of|key) service achcha be[pres.sg.23] .

747All those who explain to the groups here are also good.

493यहाँ ( ओम् शान्ति भवन में ) भी जो ग्रुप समझाते हैं , वो भी अच्छी सेवा है . yahā̃ ( ōm śhānti bhavan mē̃ ) bhī jō group samjhātē haĩ , vō bhī achchhī sēvā hai . yahā̃ ( ōm śhānti[x] bhavan[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] ) bhī[p.] jō[pn.;d.] group samjhānā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] , vah[pn.;d.] bhī[p.] achchhā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] sēvā[n.f.;sg.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] . here ( Om Shanti Bhavan in ) too that group explain[pres.pl.m.12hon3] , that too achcha service be[pres.sg.23] .

748Whether it is the museum, whether it is Om Shanti Bhavan, whether it is Talheti or the Peace Park, you are all doing service, are you not?

494तो सब जगह सेवा सहज होती जाती है , प्रभाव पड़ता जाता है . tō sab jagah sēvā sahaj hōtī jātī hai , prabhāv paṛtā jātā hai . tō sab[adj.] jagah[n.f.;sg.] sēvā[n.f.;sg.] sahaj[adj.] hōnā[pres.sg.f.23.pres-part+jānā] , prabhāv[n.m.;sg.,d.] paṛnā[pres.sg.m.23.pres-part+jānā] . then all x service easy be[pres.sg.f.23.pres-part+jānā] , x fall[pres.sg.m.23.pres-part+jānā] .

749At every place, the service is being carried out easily and the influence is being spread.

495अच्छा है . achchhā hai . achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] . achcha be[pres.sg.23] .

750It is good. 751Achcha.

496अच्छा , मधुबन वाले क्या करेंगे  ? achchhā , madhuban vālē kyā karē̃gē  ? achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] , madhuban[n.m.;sg.,d.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] kyā karnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3]  ? achcha , Madhuban those who what do[fut.m.pl.12hon3]  ?

752What will those from Madhuban do? 753Madhuban niwasis should constantly consider themselves to be the image of support and the examples. 754In practical action, the Madhuban niwasis are the example and also the image of support, because all the facilities that are needed are provided by Madhuban; the spiritual facilities. 755This is why the Madhuban niwasis should not think that they are just in a room of Madhuban, or that they are in Pandav Bhavan, but that they are the image of support in every action, every thought and every word.

497मधुबन वाले सदा ही अपने को आधा ­ रमूर्त और उदाहरणमूर्त समझो . madhuban vālē sadā hī apnē kō ādhā ­ ramūrta aur udāharaṇmūrt samjhō . madhuban[n.m.;sg.,d.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] sadā hī[p.] apnā[pn.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] kō[postp.] ādhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] ­ x aur udāharaṇmūrt[n.f.;sg.] samajhnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] . Madhuban those who constantly only one’s own to half ­ x and x understand[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

756Whatever specialities anyone sees in practical actions and words, they are seen in Madhuban.

498साकार कर्म में मधुबन निवासी उदाहरण हैं और आधारमूर्त भी हैं . sākār karma mē̃ madhuban nivāsī udāharaṇ haĩ aur ādhārmūrt bhī haĩ . sākār, sākārī[adj.] karm[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] madhuban[n.m.;sg.,d.] nivāsī[n.m.;sg.,d.] udāharaṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] aur ādhārmūrt[n.f.;sg.] bhī[p.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] . sakar deed in Madhuban resident x be[pres.pl.12hon3] and image of support too be[pres.pl.12hon3] .

757So, you are constantly the image of support at every moment, and you are also the image of an example.

499क्योंकि जो भी रूहानी साधन चाहिये वो सब तो मधुबन से ही जाते हैं . kyōṅki jō bhī rūhānī sādhan chāhiyē vō sab tō madhuban sē hī jātē haĩ . kyōṅki jō[pn.;d.] bhī[p.] rūhānī[adj.] sādhan[n.m.;sg.,d.] chāhiē vah[pn.;d.] sab[adj.] tō madhuban[n.m.;sg.,d.] sē[postp.] hī[p.] jānā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] . because that too spiritual facilities should that all then Madhuban from only go[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

758If you do something good, you become an example and even if you do something mixed, then also you become an example.

500इसलिये मधुबन वाले ये नहीं समझें कि हम मधुबन के कमरे में हैं या पाण्डव भवन के अन्दर रहते हैं लेकिन हर कर्म में , हर संकल्प में , हर बोल में आधारमूर्त हो . isliyē madhuban vālē yē nahī̃ samajhē̃ ki ham madhuban kē|K kamrē mē̃ haĩ yā pāṇḍav bhavan kē|K andar rahtē haĩ lēkin har|her karma mē̃ , har|her saṅkalp mē̃ , har|her bōl mē̃ ādhārmūrt hō . isliē madhuban[n.m.;sg.,d.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] yah[pn.pl.d.] nahī̃[neg] samajhnā[opt.pl.12hon3] ki[conj.] ham[pn.pl.] madhuban[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K kamrā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] mē̃[postp.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] yā pāṇḍav bhavan[x] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K andar rahnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] lēkin har|harnā[root]|her karm[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] , har|harnā[root]|her saṅkalp[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] , har|harnā[root]|her bōl[n.m.;sg.,d.]|bōlnā[root] mē̃[postp.] ādhārmūrt[n.f.;sg.] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] . therefore Madhuban those who this not understand[opt.pl.12hon3] that we Madhuban (of|K) x in be[pres.pl.12hon3] or x (of|K) inside remain[pres.pl.m.12hon3] but (x|x[root]) deed in , (x|x[root]) thought in , (x|x[root]) (x|speak[root]) in image of support (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) .

759Everyone gives the example of Madhuban. 760This is why the Madhuban niwasis have such a huge crown of responsibility. 761The hospital is also included in Madhuban. 762Talhetiis included, the museum is included, Gyan Sarovar is included, Sangam Bhavan is included.

501हर एक जो विशेषता देखते हैं कर्म में , वाणी में , वो प्रैक्टिकल मधुबन में ही देखते हैं . har ēk jō viśhēṣhtā dēkhtē haĩ karma mē̃ , vāṇī mē̃ , vō practical madhuban mē̃ hī dēkhtē haĩ . har ēk[x] jō[pn.;d.] viśhēṣhtā[n.f.;sg.] dēkhnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] karm[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] , vāṇī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] mē̃[postp.] , vah[pn.;d.] practical madhuban[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] hī[p.] dēkhnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] . each one that speciality see[pres.pl.m.12hon3] deed in , words in , that practical Madhuban in only see[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

763There are few at Sangam Bhavan but you do service tirelessly. 764The residents at Sangam Bhavan do very good running around. 765Residents of Sangam Bhavan, raise your hands. 766Achcha.

502तो सदा हर समय आधारमूर्त भी हो और उदाहरणमूर्त भी हो . tō sadā har|her samay ādhārmūrt bhī hō aur udāharaṇmūrt bhī hō . tō sadā har|harnā[root]|her samay[n.m.;sg.,d.] ādhārmūrt[n.f.;sg.] bhī[p.] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] aur udāharaṇmūrt[n.f.;sg.] bhī[p.] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] . then constantly (x|x[root]) time image of support too (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) and x too (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) .

767How's everything at the hospital? 768Is it all right? 769It is OK? 770Is the Hospital very good or only good?

503चाहे अच्छा करते हो तो भी उदाहरण बनते हो और मिक्स करते हो तो भी उदाहरण . chāhē achchhā kartē hō tō bhī udāharaṇ bantē hō aur mix kartē hō tō bhī udāharaṇ . chāhnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|chāhē|chāhnā[opt.sg.23] achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] karnā[pres.pl.m.2] tō bhī[x] udāharaṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.] bannā[pres.pl.m.2] aur mix karnā[pres.pl.m.2] tō bhī[x] udāharaṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.] . (x[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|whether|x[opt.sg.23]) achcha do[pres.pl.m.2] ∅ x become[pres.pl.m.2] and x do[pres.pl.m.2] ∅ x .

771What is the speciality of the hospital? 772On one side, you think that no one should be a patient, and the hospital thinks it should have patients.

504उदाहरण सभी मधुबन का ही देते हैं . udāharaṇ sabhī madhuban kā hī dētē haĩ . udāharaṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.] sab[adv.hī] madhuban[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hī[p.] dēnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] . x all Madhuban of only give[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

773They become unhappy if they have no patients. 774You bring patience to the patients.

505इसीलिये इतना जिम्मेदारी का बड़ा ताज मधुबन निवासियों को पड़ा हुआ है . isīliyē itnā jimmēdārī kā baṛā tāj madhuban nivāsiyō̃ kō paṛā huā hai . isliē itnā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] x kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] baṛā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] tāj[n.m.;sg.,d.] madhuban[n.m.;sg.,d.] nivāsī[n.m.+ō̃;pl.o.] kō[postp.] paṛnā[past-part.m.sg.d.] hōnā[pres-perf.sg.m.23] . therefore such x of very crown Madhuban resident to fall[past-part.m.sg.d.] be[pres-perf.sg.m.23] .

775So, not only do the patients come to the hospital, but even those who wish to imbibe patience come to the hospital. 776It is good.

506अच्छा-संगम भवन के थोड़े हैं लेकिन सेवा बहुत अथक करते हैं . acchā-saṅgam bhavan kē|K thōṛē haĩ lēkin sēvā bahut athak kartē haĩ . x bhavan[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K thōṛā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] lēkin sēvā[n.f.;sg.] bahut athak[adj.] karnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] . x Bhavan (of|K) short be[pres.pl.12hon3] but service very x do[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

777The Brahmins have the maximum benefit from the hospital. 778You just sit in the ambulance and you arrive there. 779It provides good help.

507संगम निवासी भागदौड़ का काम अच्छा करते हैं . saṅgam nivāsī bhāgdauṛ kā kām achchhā kartē haĩ . saṅgam[n.m.;sg.,d.] nivāsī[n.m.;sg.,d.] bhāg-dauṛ[n.f.;sg.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] kām[n.m.;sg.,d.]|kām[n.m.;sg.,d.] achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] karnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] . confluence resident running around of (task|lust) achcha do[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

780Firstly, it helps the Brahmins and secondly, people used to wonder and say that you do not do anything, and now they think, "Yes, they do do something.

508अच्छा - हॉस्पिटल का क्या हालचाल है  ? achchhā - hospital kā kyā hālchāl hai  ? achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] - hospital kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] kyā hāl-chāl[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23]  ? achcha - hospital of what how they are be[pres.sg.23]  ?

781They do a lot". 782So the hospital has increased the service.

509हॉस्पिटल बहुत अच्छा है कि अच्छा है  ? hospital bahut achchhā hai ki achchhā hai  ? hospital bahut achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] ki[conj.] achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23]  ? hospital very achcha be[pres.sg.23] that achcha be[pres.sg.23]  ?

783You have transformed the people's saying "They do not do anything" to "Yes, they do do something".

510देखो हॉस्पिटल की विशेषता क्या है  ? dēkhō hospital kī|key viśhēṣhtā kyā hai  ? dēkhnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] hospital karnā[past-part.f.]|kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|key viśhēṣhtā[n.f.;sg.] kyā hōnā[pres.sg.23]  ? see[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] hospital (do[past-part.f.]|of|key) speciality what be[pres.sg.23]  ?

784It is like this, is it not? 785Those from the hospital, raise your hands.

511वैसे सोचते हैं कि पेशेन्ट कोई नहीं हो , और हॉस्पिटल सोचती है कि पेशेन्ट आवें . vaisē sōchtē haĩ ki patient kōī nahī̃ hō , aur hospital sōchtī hai ki patient āvē̃ . vaisā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] sōchnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] ki[conj.] patient kōī[pn.;d.] nahī̃[neg] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] , aur hospital sōchnā[pres.sg.f.23] ki[conj.] patient ānā[opt.pl.12hon3] . x think[pres.pl.m.12hon3] that x some not (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) , and hospital think[pres.sg.f.23] that x come[opt.pl.12hon3] .

786Achcha. 787Those from the Health Care (next to Talheti) have also come. 788It is good. 789When those at the hospital have time, you should do a lot of service through the mind.

512अगर पेशेन्ट नहीं आते तो उदास हो जाते हैं . agar patient nahī̃ ātē tō udās hō jātē haĩ . agar patient nahī̃[neg] ānā[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] tō udās[adj.] hōnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3.root+jānā] . if x not come[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] then unhappy be[pres.pl.m.12hon3.root+jānā] .

790Then you cannot become free from that. 791Achcha.

513पेशेन्ट को पेशन्स में लाते हैं . patient kō patience mē̃ lātē haĩ . patient kō[postp.] patience mē̃[postp.] lānā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] . x to x in x[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

792To all the elevated souls in all four directions who have faith in the intellect; to the souls who have guaranteed victory; to the constantly carefree souls; to the elevated souls who become the instruments to bring about expansion through the accurate method; to the close souls who constantly remain unshakeable and immovable in belonging to the one Father and in having the strength of One and the support of One, BapDada's love, remembrances and namaste. 793BapDada meeting the Dadis: (Dadiji had gone to Bombay and Ahmedabad and Dadi Janki had gone to Poona for service): You have toured and come back? 794You are the jewels of contentment who give contentment to others. 795What will the jewels of contentment do wherever they go?

514तो हॉस्पिटल में सिर्फ पेशेन्ट नहीं लेकिन पेशन्स धारण करने वाले पेशेन्ट भी आते हैं . tō hospital mē̃ sirph patient nahī̃ lēkin patience dhāraṇ karnē vālē patient bhī ātē haĩ . tō hospital mē̃[postp.] sirph[adj.] patient nahī̃[neg] lēkin patience dhāraṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.] karnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] patient bhī[p.] ānā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] . then hospital in only x not but x adopting do[inf.m.pl.,o.] those who x too come[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

796They will make everyone content, will they not? 797Whether in terms of the body or in terms of the mind, you make both types of souls ready.

515अच्छा है , सबसे ज्यादा हॉस्पिटल का फायदा ब्राह्मणों को है . achchhā hai , sabsē jyādā hospital kā phāydā brāhmaṇō̃ kō hai . achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] , sabsē jyādā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hospital kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] fāydā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] brāhmaṇ[n.m.+ō̃;pl.o.] kō[postp.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] . achcha be[pres.sg.23] , the most more hospital of profit Brahmin to be[pres.sg.23] .

798This is why BapDada constantly calls you the jewels of contentment. 799It is good. 800You have come carrying a basket of remembrances, haven't you?

516एम्बुलेन्स में बैठे और पहुँच गये . ambulance mē̃ baiṭhē aur pahũch gayē . ambulance mē̃[postp.] baiṭhnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|baiṭhnā[opt.sg.23] aur pahuñchnā[past-part.m.pl.,o..root+jānā] . x in (sit[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|sit[opt.sg.23]) and reach[past-part.m.pl.,o..root+jānā] .

801(Everyone's remembrances were given to Baba.)

517अच्छी मदद है . achchhī madad hai . achchhā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] madad[n.f.;sg.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] . achcha x be[pres.sg.23] .

802It is good that all were refreshed.

518एक तो ब्राह्मणों को मदद है और दूसरा जो लोग समझते हैं कि ये कुछ नहीं करते हैं वो समझते हैं कि हाँ ये करते हैं , बहुत करते हैं . ēk tō brāhmaṇō̃ kō madad hai aur dūsrā jō lōg samajhtē haĩ ki yē kuchh nahī̃ kartē haĩ vō samajhtē haĩ ki hā̃ yē kartē haĩ , bahut kartē haĩ . ēk[adj.] tō brāhmaṇ[n.m.+ō̃;pl.o.] kō[postp.] madad[n.f.;sg.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] aur dūsrā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] jō[pn.;d.] log[n.m.;sg.,d.] samajhnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] ki[conj.] yah[pn.pl.d.] kuchh nahī̃[neg] karnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] vah[pn.;d.] samajhnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] ki[conj.] hā̃ yah[pn.pl.d.] karnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] , bahut karnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] . one then Brahmin to x be[pres.sg.23] and other that people understand[pres.pl.m.12hon3] that this anything not do[pres.pl.m.12hon3] that understand[pres.pl.m.12hon3] that yes this do[pres.pl.m.12hon3] , very do[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

803You have multimillions merged in your every step. 804This is why, when each of you goes on a tour, the spinning of many souls is finished. 805They are all able to receive whatever they need, and this is why the wasteful spinning of many souls is finished.

519हॉस्पिटल ने सेवा बढ़ाई ना . hospital nē sēvā baṛhāī nā . hospital nē[postp.] sēvā[n.f.;sg.] baṛhānā[past-part.f.] nā . hospital ∅ service increase[past-part.f.] ∅ .

806You experience it to be like this, do you not?

520‘ कुछ नहीं ’ को ‘ करते हैं ’ में परिवर्तन कर लिया . ‘ kuchh nahī̃ ’ kō ‘ kartē haĩ ’ mē̃ parivartan kar liyā . ‘ kuchh nahī̃[neg] ’ kō[postp.] ‘ karnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] ’ mē̃[postp.] parivartan[n.m.;sg.,d.] karnā[past-part.m.sg.d..root+lēnā] . ‘ anything not ’ to ‘ do[pres.pl.m.12hon3] ’ in transformation do[past-part.m.sg.d..root+lēnā] .

807Everyone has love for the Dadis. 808Everyone has love for all those who are the instruments.

521ऐसे है ना . aisē hai nā . aisā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] nā . such be[pres.sg.23] ∅ .

809Dadi Janki:It is good.

522अच्छा है , हॉस्पिटल वाले अगर फुर्सत मिलती है तो मंसा सेवा बहुत करो . achchhā hai , hospital vālē agar phursat miltī hai tō mansā sēvā bahut karō . achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] , hospital vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] agar phursat[n.f.;sg.] milnā[pres.sg.f.23] tō mansā sēvā[n.f.;sg.] bahut karnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] . achcha be[pres.sg.23] , hospital those who if time receive[pres.sg.f.23] then through the mind service very do[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

810Everything becomes all right with determined faith. 811No matter how bitter someone's sanskars are, where there is determination, everything finishes like wax.

523उससे फुर्सत नहीं मिलेगी . ussē phursat nahī̃ milēgī . vah[pn.sg.sē] phursat[n.f.;sg.] nahī̃[neg] milnā[fut.f.sg.23] . that[.sē] time not receive[fut.f.sg.23] . 524अच्छा . achchhā . achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] . achcha .

812Jagdishbhai: What newness will you now bring?

525चारों ओर के सर्व निश्चयबुद्धि श्रेष्ठ आत्मायें , सदा निश्चित विजयी आत्मायें , सदा निश्चिन्त आत्मायें , सदा श्रेष्ठ विधि द्वारा वृद्धि करने के निमित्त बनने वाली विशेष आत्मायें , सदा एक बाप एक बल एक भरोसे में अचल ­ अडोल रहने वाले समीप आत्माओं को बापदादा का याद ­ प्यार और नमस्ते . chārō̃ ōr kē|K sarv niśhchaybuddhi śhrēṣhṭh ātmāyē̃ , sadā niśhchit vijayī ātmāyē̃ , sadā niśhchinta ātmāyē̃ , sadā śhrēṣhṭh vidhi dvārā vr̥iddhi karnē kē nimitt bannē vālī viśhēṣh ātmāyē̃ , sadā ēk bāp ēk bal ēk bharōsē mē̃ achal ­ aḍōl rahnē vālē samīp ātmāō̃ kō bāpdādā kā yād ­ pyār aur namastē . chārō̃ ōr[x] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K sarv[adj.] niśhchaybuddhi[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] śhrēṣhṭha[adj.] ātmā[n.f.+ē̃;pl.d.] , sadā niśhchit[adj.] vijayī[adj.] ātmā[n.f.+ē̃;pl.d.] , sadā niśhchint[x] ātmā[n.f.+ē̃;pl.d.] , sadā śhrēṣhṭha[adj.] vidhi[n.m.;sg.,d.] dvārā vr̥iddhi[n.f.;sg.] karnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] kē nimitt[x] bannā[inf.m.pl.,o.] vālā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] viśhēṣh[adj.] ātmā[n.f.+ē̃;pl.d.] , sadā ēk[adj.] bāp[n.m.;sg.,d.] ēk[adj.] bal[n.m.;sg.,d.] ēk[adj.] bharōsā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] mē̃[postp.] achal ­ aḍōl[adj.] rahnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] samīp[adj.] ātmā[n.f.+ō̃;pl.o.] kō[postp.] bāpdādā kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] yād[n.f.;sg.] ­ pyār[n.m.;sg.,d.] aur namastē . everywhere (of|K) all intellect with faith elevated soul , constantly fixed victorious soul , constantly without worry soul , constantly elevated method through growth do[inf.m.pl.,o.] x become[inf.m.pl.,o.] those who special soul , constantly one father one strength one guarantee in unshakeable ­ unshakeable remain[inf.m.pl.,o.] those who close soul to BapDada of remembrance ­ love and x .

813(Of a large programme of creating "mikes".) 814When the sound comes from all corners together from everywhere, then the sound will be spread far and loudly. 815Continue to say Hanji, ha ji and everyone says Ha ji. 816Those from the foreign lands should say Ha ji to those from this land and those from this land should say ha ji to those from the foreign lands.

526दादियों सेः ­ ( दादी जी बाम्बे अहमदाबाद तथा जानकी दादी पूना सेवा पर गई थी ) चक्कर लगाकर आई . dādiyō̃ sēḥ ­ ( dādī jī bāmbē ahamadābād tathā jānkī dādī pūnā sēvā par gaī thī ) chakkar lagākar eye|āī|I . dādī[n.f.ī=>iyō̃;pl.o.] x ­ ( dādī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] jīnā[past-part.f.]|jīnā[root]|jī[x] bāmbē ahamadābād tathā jānkī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] dādī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] pūnā sēvā[n.f.;sg.] par[postp.]|par[adj.] jānā[past-perf.f.] ) chakra, chakkar[n.m.;sg.,d.] lagānā[abs.] eye|ānā[past-part.f.]|I . Dadi x ­ ( Dadi (live[past-part.f.]|live[root]|ji) Bombay x and x Dadi x service (at|other) go[past-perf.f.] ) cycle attach[abs.] (eye|come[past-part.f.]|x) .

817What will there be when everyone says Ha ji? 818The task is already accomplished. 819The facilities are very good. 820Simply learn how to become a master and a child.

527सन्तुष्टता दिलाने वाली सन्तुष्ट मणियाँ हो . santuṣhṭatā dilānē vālī santuṣhṭ maṇiyā̃ hō . santuṣhṭatā[n.f.;sg.] dilānā[inf.m.pl.,o.] vālā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] santuṣhṭ[adj.] maṇi[n.f.ī=>iyā̃;pl.d.] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] . contentment x[inf.m.pl.,o.] those who content jewel (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) .

821Be a child at the right time and be a master at the right time.

528तो सन्तुष्ट मणियाँ जहाँ भी जायेंगी तो सन्तुष्ट करेंगी ना  ! tō santuṣhṭ maṇiyā̃ jahā̃ bhī jāyēṅgī tō santuṣhṭ karē̃gī nā  ! tō santuṣhṭ[adj.] maṇi[n.f.ī=>iyā̃;pl.d.] jahā̃ bhī[p.] jānā[fut.f.pl.12hon3] tō santuṣhṭ[adj.] karnā[fut.f.pl.12hon3] nā  ! then content jewel where there too go[fut.f.pl.12hon3] then content do[fut.f.pl.12hon3] ∅  !

822Do all of you know how to become this? 823Do you know how to become this?

529चाहे तन वालों को , चाहे मन वालों को , दोनों प्रकार से सन्तुष्ट करते हैं . chāhē tan vālō̃ kō , chāhē man vālō̃ kō , dōnō̃ prakār sē santuṣhṭ kartē haĩ . chāhnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|chāhē|chāhnā[opt.sg.23] tan[n.m.;sg.,d.] vālā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] kō[postp.] , chāhnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|chāhē|chāhnā[opt.sg.23] man[n.m.;sg.,d.] vālā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] kō[postp.] , dōnō̃ prakār[n.m.;sg.,d.] sē[postp.] santuṣhṭ[adj.] karnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] . (x[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|whether|x[opt.sg.23]) body those who to , (x[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|whether|x[opt.sg.23]) mind those who to , x form from content do[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

824Or, do you become a master when you have to become a child? 825Achcha. 826Your group is one that says Ha ji, is it not? 827It is good.

530इसीलिये बापदादा सदा सन्तुष्ट मणियाँ कहते हैं . isīliyē bāpdādā sadā santuṣhṭ maṇiyā̃ kahtē haĩ . isliē bāpdādā sadā santuṣhṭ[adj.] maṇi[n.f.ī=>iyā̃;pl.d.] kahnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] . therefore BapDada constantly content jewel say[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

828BapDada will see who has made the lesson of Ha ji firm. 829You do do this.

531 ( सभी की याद दी ) अच्छा है . ( sabhī kī|key yād dī|the ) achchhā hai . ( sab[adv.hī] karnā[past-part.f.]|kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|key yād[n.f.;sg.] dēnā[past-part.f.]|the ) achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] . ( all (do[past-part.f.]|of|key) remembrance (give[past-part.f.]|the) ) achcha be[pres.sg.23] . 532याद का टोकरा भरकर आये हैं . yād kā ṭōkarā bharkar āyē haĩ . yād[n.f.;sg.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] x bharnā[abs.] ānā[pres-perf.pl.m.12hon3] . remembrance of x fill[abs.] come[pres-perf.pl.m.12hon3] .

830It is not that you don't, but Baba will see this at the time of a particular task.

533कदम में पदमभरे हुए हैं . kadam mē̃ padamabharē huē haĩ . kadam[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] x hōnā[pres-perf.pl.m.12hon3] . step in x be[pres-perf.pl.m.12hon3] . 534इसलिये आपके चक्कर लगाने से अनेकों के चक्कर समाप्त हो जाते हैं . isliyē āpkē chakkar lagānē sē anēkō̃ kē|K chakkar samāpt hō jātē haĩ . isliē āp[pn.pl.kē] chakra, chakkar[n.m.;sg.,d.] lagānā[inf.m.pl.,o.] sē[postp.] anēk[n.m.+ō̃;pl.o.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K chakra, chakkar[n.m.;sg.,d.] samāpt[adj.] hōnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3.root+jānā] . therefore you[.kē] cycle attach[inf.m.pl.,o.] from many (of|K) cycle finished be[pres.pl.m.12hon3.root+jānā] .

831Achcha. 832Dadi Chandermani will go to inaugurate the Kumbh Mela:You have received a very good seat. 833Continue to tour around.

535जिनको जो चाहिये वो मिल जाता है . jinkō jō chāhiyē vō mil jātā hai . jō[pn.pl.kō] jō[pn.;d.] chāhiē vah[pn.;d.] milnā[pres.sg.m.23.root+jānā] . that[.kō] that should that receive[pres.sg.m.23.root+jānā] .

834Continue to experience pleasure and bring pleasure to others.

536इसलिये अनेकों के व्यर्थ चक्कर खत्म हो जाते हैं . isliyē anēkō̃ kē|K vyarth chakkar khatm hō jātē haĩ . isliē anēk[n.m.+ō̃;pl.o.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K vyarth[n.m.;sg.,d.] chakra, chakkar[n.m.;sg.,d.] ḵẖatm[adj.] hōnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3.root+jānā] . therefore many (of|K) wasteful cycle finished be[pres.pl.m.12hon3.root+jānā] .

835Look, were you able to tour around when you were sitting in a corner of Punjab?

537ऐसे ही अनुभव होता है ना  ? aisē hī anubhav hōtā hai nā  ? aisā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] hī[p.] anubhav[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.m.23] nā  ? such only experience be[pres.sg.m.23] ∅  ?

836Now that you have become a Madhuban

538दादियों में सबका प्यार है ना . dādiyō̃ mē̃ sabkā pyār hai nā . dādī[n.f.ī=>iyō̃;pl.o.] mē̃[postp.] sabkā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] pyār[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] nā . Dadi in everyone's love be[pres.sg.23] ∅ .

837niwasi, you are able to tour around.

539जो भी निमित्त हैं उन्हों में प्यार है . jō bhī nimitt haĩ unhō̃ mē̃ pyār hai . jō[pn.;d.] bhī[p.] nimitt[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] vah[pn.pl.o.] mē̃[postp.] pyār[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] . that too instrument be[pres.pl.12hon3] that in love be[pres.sg.23] .

838The gathering of the Pandavs and Shaktis together is very good.

540 ( दादी जानकी ) अच्छा है , दृढ़ निश्चय से सब ठीक हो जाता है . ( dādī jānkī ) achchhā hai , dr̥iṛh niśhchay sē sab ṭhīk hō jātā hai . ( dādī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] jānkī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] ) achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] , dr̥iṛh[adj.] niśhchay[n.m.;sg.,d.] sē[postp.] sab[adj.] ṭhīk[adj.] hōnā[pres.sg.m.23.root+jānā] . ( Dadi x ) achcha be[pres.sg.23] , determined faith from all OK be[pres.sg.m.23.root+jānā] .

839The Pandavs cannot move without the Shaktis and the Shaktis cannot move without the Pandavs.

541कितने भी कड़े संस्कार हो लेकिन जहाँ दृढ़ता है वहाँ सब एकदम मोम के समान खत्म हो जाते हैं . kitnē bhī kaṛē saṅskār hō lēkin jahā̃ dr̥iṛhtā hai vahā̃ sab ēkdam mōm kē|K samān khatm hō jātē haĩ . kitnā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] bhī[p.] kaṛā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] saṅskār[x] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] lēkin jahā̃ dr̥iṛhtā[n.f.;sg.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] vahā̃ sab[adj.] ēkdam mōm[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K samān[adj.] ḵẖatm[adj.] hōnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3.root+jānā] . so too severe sanskar (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) but where there determination be[pres.sg.23] there all x wax (of|K) equal finished be[pres.pl.m.12hon3.root+jānā] .

840Both are needed. 841Both have been needed from the beginning and they will be needed till the end. 842Are all of you happy?

542जगदीश भाई से - अब क्या करेंगे नवीनता  ? Jagdīśh bhāī sē - ab kyā karē̃gē navīntā  ? Jagdīśh[n.m.;sg.,d.] bhāī[n.m.;sg.,d.]|bhānā[past-part.f.] sē[postp.] - ab[adv.] kyā karnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] navīntā[n.f.;sg.]  ? x (brother|be liked[past-part.f.]) from - now what do[fut.m.pl.12hon3] newness  ?

843How happy are you? 844100% or only a percentage?

543 ( विशाल प्रोग्राम माइक बनाने का ) एक बारी इकट्ठासभी कोने से आवाज आये तो बुलन्द हो . ( viśhāl programme mike banānē kā ) ēk bārī ikaṭṭhāsabhī kōnē sē āvāj āyē tō buland hō . ( viśhāl[adj.] programme mike banānā[inf.m.pl.,o.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] ) ēk[adj.] bārī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] x kōnā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] sē[postp.] āvāz[n.f.;sg.] ānā[opt.sg.23]|ānā[past-part.m.pl.,o.] tō buland[adj.] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] . ( broad and unlimited programme mike create[inf.m.pl.,o.] of ) one x x corner from noise (come[opt.sg.23]|come[past-part.m.pl.,o.]) then x (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) .

845Wherever all of you have come from, you are the ones who have the best fortune of all. 846You are elevated. 847You are loved by the Father.

544हाँ जी , हाँ जी करते चलो और सबका हाँ जी हो ही जाना है . hā̃ jī , hā̃ jī kartē chalō aur sabkā hā̃ jī hō hī jānā hai . hā̃ jī[x] , hā̃ jī[x] karnā[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] chalnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] aur sabkā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hā̃ jī[x] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] hī[p.] jānnā[pres-perf.sg.m.23]|jānā[pres.sg.23.oblig1] . yes , yes do[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] continue[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] and everyone's yes (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) only (know[pres-perf.sg.m.23]|go[pres.sg.23.oblig1]) .

848Whether you have come from the foreign lands or from this land, each one of you is loved by the Father.

545विदेश वाले देश वालों को कहे हाँ जी और देश वाले विदेश वालों को कहे हाँ जी . vidēśh vālē dēśh vālō̃ kō kahē hā̃ jī aur dēśh vālē vidēśh vālō̃ kō kahē hā̃ jī . vidēśh[n.m.;sg.,d.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] dēśh[n.m.;sg.,d.] vālā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] kō[postp.] kahnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|kahnā[opt.sg.23] hā̃ jī[x] aur dēśh[n.m.;sg.,d.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] vidēśh[n.m.;sg.,d.] vālā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] kō[postp.] kahnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|kahnā[opt.sg.23] hā̃ jī[x] . abroad those who land those who to (say[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|say[opt.sg.23]) yes and land those who abroad those who to (say[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|say[opt.sg.23]) yes .

849A variety of souls have come. 850Achcha, where is the largest number of souls in the foreign countries? 851You are the decoration.

546तो जहाँ हाँ जी होगा वहाँ हुआ ही पड़ा है . tō jahā̃ hā̃ jī hōgā vahā̃ huā hī paṛā hai . tō jahā̃ hā̃ jī[x] hōnā[fut.m.sg.23] vahā̃ hōnā[past-part.m.sg.d.] hī[p.] paṛnā[pres-perf.sg.m.23] . then where there yes be[fut.m.sg.23] there be[past-part.m.sg.d.] only fall[pres-perf.sg.m.23] .

852Whether you have come from Canada or from Brazil, you are the Father's decoration.

547साधन बहुत अच्छा है सिर्फ बालक और मालिक बनना आ जाये . sādhan bahut achchhā hai sirph bālak aur mālik bannā ā jāyē . sādhan[n.m.;sg.,d.] bahut achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] sirph[adj.] bālak[n.m.;sg.,d.] aur mālik[n.m.;sg.,d.] bannā[inf.m.sg.d.] ānā[past-part.m.pl.,o..root+jānā] . facilities very achcha be[pres.sg.23] only x and master become[inf.m.sg.d.] come[past-part.m.pl.,o..root+jānā] .

853The Father cannot do anything without you. 854This is why BapDada says: The children are first.

548समय पर बालक , समय पर मालिक . samay par bālak , samay par mālik . samay[n.m.;sg.,d.] par[postp.]|par[adj.] bālak[n.m.;sg.,d.] , samay[n.m.;sg.,d.] par[postp.]|par[adj.] mālik[n.m.;sg.,d.] . time (at|other) x , time (at|other) master . 549सभी को बनना आता है  ? sabhī kō bannā ātā hai  ? sab[adv.hī] kō[postp.] bannā[inf.m.sg.d.] ānā[pres.sg.m.23]  ? all to become[inf.m.sg.d.] come[pres.sg.m.23]  ?

855Do you think this? 856Does each one think that he is loved by the Father?

550कि जिस समय बालक बनना है उस समय मालिकपन आ जाता है  ? ki jis samay bālak bannā hai us samay mālikpan ā jātā hai  ? ki[conj.] jis samay[x] bālak[n.m.;sg.,d.] bannā[pres.sg.23.oblig1] vah[pn.sg.o.] samay[n.m.;sg.,d.] mālikpan[n.m.;sg.,d.] ānā[pres.sg.m.23.root+jānā]  ? that x x become[pres.sg.23.oblig1] that time being a master come[pres.sg.m.23.root+jānā]  ?

857Only the one unlimited Father can give love to everyone.

551तो बापदादा देखेंगे कि हाँ जी का पाठ किसने पक्का किया है  ? tō bāpdādā dēkhē̃gē ki hā̃ jī kā pāṭh kisnē pakkā kiyā hai  ? tō bāpdādā dēkhnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] ki[conj.] hā̃ jī[x] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] pāṭh[n.m.;sg.,d.] kaun[pn.sg.nē] pakkā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] karnā[pres-perf.sg.m.23]  ? then BapDada see[fut.m.pl.12hon3] that yes of lesson who[.nē] firm do[pres-perf.sg.m.23]  ?

858Souls cannot give this, only the Father can give this, because He is unlimited.

552सभी करते हैं , ऐसी कोई बात नहीं है लेकिन कार्य के टाइम देखेंगे . sabhī kartē haĩ , aisī kōī bāt nahī̃ hai lēkin kārya kē|K time dēkhē̃gē . sab[adv.hī] karnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] , aisā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] kōī[pn.;d.] bāt[n.f.;sg.] nahī̃[neg] hōnā[pres.sg.23] lēkin kārya[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K time dēkhnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] . all do[pres.pl.m.12hon3] , such some matter not be[pres.sg.23] but task (of|K) time see[fut.m.pl.12hon3] .

859So each one feels himself to be loved by the Father. 860Whether anyone's name is mentioned or not, each one is loved.

553अच्छा  ! achchhā  ! achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.]  ! achcha  !

861Achcha.

554 ( दादी चन्द्रमणी इलाहाबाद कुम्भ मेले में जा रही हैं ) आपको सीट बहुत अच्छी मिली है , चक्कर लगाते रहो , मौज मनाते रहो . ( dādī chandramaṇī ilāhābād kumbha mēlē mē̃ jā rahī haĩ ) āpkō seat bahut achchhī milī hai , chakkar lagātē rahō , mauj manātē rahō . ( dādī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] chandramaṇi[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] ilāhābād[n.m.;sg.,d.] kumbh[x] mēlā[x] mē̃[postp.] jānā[pres.pl.f.prog.12hon3] ) āp[pn.pl.kō] seat bahut achchhā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] milnā[pres-perf.sg.f.23] , chakra, chakkar[n.m.;sg.,d.] lagānā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2.pres-part+rahnā] , mauj[n.f.;sg.] manānā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2.pres-part+rahnā] . ( Dadi Chandermani x kumbh fair in go[pres.pl.f.prog.12hon3] ) you[.kō] seat very achcha receive[pres-perf.sg.f.23] , cycle attach[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2.pres-part+rahnā] , pleasure celebrate[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2.pres-part+rahnā] .

862It is good that those who bring the "mikes", and those who give light give happiness; even those who make the toli and feed others. 863When you are given toli, you become so happy.

555और दूसरों को भी मौज में लाते रहो . aur dūsrō̃ kō bhī mauj mē̃ lātē rahō . aur dūsrā[n.m.+ō̃;pl.o.] kō[postp.] bhī[p.] mauj[n.f.;sg.] mē̃[postp.] lānā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2.pres-part+rahnā] . and other to too pleasure in x[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2.pres-part+rahnā] .

864Whatever each of you does, you give happiness to one another.

556अच्छा , पाण्डव और शक्तियाँ दोनों का संगठन अच्छा है . achchhā , pāṇḍav aur śhaktiyā̃ dōnō̃ kā saṅgaṭhan achchhā hai . achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] , pāṇḍav[n.m.;sg.,d.] aur śhakti[n.f.ī=>iyā̃;pl.d.] dōnō̃ kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] saṅgaṭhan[x] achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] . achcha , Pandava and Shakti x of gathering achcha be[pres.sg.23] .

865You do not just give toli, you give happiness. 866It is not just a "mike" you give, you give happiness.

557शक्ति के बिना पाण्डव नहीं चलते , पाण्डवों के बिना शक्तियाँ नहीं चल सकतीं . śhakti kē|K binā pāṇḍav nahī̃ chaltē , pāṇḍavō̃ kē|K binā śhaktiyā̃ nahī̃ chal saktī̃ . śhakti[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K binā pāṇḍav[n.m.;sg.,d.] nahī̃[neg] chalnā[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] , pāṇḍav[n.m.+ō̃;pl.o.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K binā śhakti[n.f.ī=>iyā̃;pl.d.] nahī̃[neg] chalnā[root] saknā[pres-part.f.pl.] . Shakti (of|K) without Pandava not continue[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] , Pandava (of|K) without Shakti not continue[root] can[pres-part.f.pl.] .

867Achcha. 868Look, each one has become clever. 869Did you know about the "mikes" before? 870But, by coming here, you have received a degree in this.

558दोनों की आवश्यकता आदि से अन्त तक रही है और रहेगी . dōnō̃ kī|key āvaśhyaktā ādi sē ant tak rahī hai aur rahēgī . dōnō̃ karnā[past-part.f.]|kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|key āvaśhyaktā[n.f.;sg.] ādi[adj.] sē[postp.] ant[n.m.;sg.,d.] tak rahnā[pres-perf.sg.f.23] aur rahnā[fut.f.sg.23] . x (do[past-part.f.]|of|key) need etc. from end until remain[pres-perf.sg.f.23] and remain[fut.f.sg.23] .

871Some for the light, some for the "mike", some for engineering, some for being a director, some for driving.

559अच्छा-जो भी जहाँ से भी आये हो , सब अच्छे ते अच्छे भाग्यवान हो , श्रेष्ठ हो , बाप के प्यारे हो . acchā-jō bhī jahā̃ sē bhī āyē hō , sab achchhē tē achchhē bhāgyavān hō , śhrēṣhṭh hō , bāp kē|K pyārē hō . x bhī[p.] jahā̃ sē[postp.] bhī[p.] ānā[pres-perf.pl.m.2] , sab[adj.] achchhā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] sē achchhā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] bhāgyavān[x] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] , śhrēṣhṭha[adj.] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] , bāp[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K pyārā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] . x too where there from too come[pres-perf.pl.m.2] , all achcha from achcha fortunate (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) , elevated (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) , father (of|K) loving (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) .

872Driving is very good. 873Everyone's life is in your hands. 874All the departments are those that give happiness. 875It is good.

560चाहे विदेश से आये हो , चाहे देश से आये हो , हर एक बाप का प्यारा है . chāhē vidēśh sē āyē hō , chāhē dēśh sē āyē hō , har ēk bāp kā pyārā hai . chāhnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|chāhē|chāhnā[opt.sg.23] vidēśh[n.m.;sg.,d.] sē[postp.] ānā[pres-perf.pl.m.2] , chāhnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|chāhē|chāhnā[opt.sg.23] dēśh[n.m.;sg.,d.] sē[postp.] ānā[pres-perf.pl.m.2] , har ēk[x] bāp[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] pyārā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] . (x[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|whether|x[opt.sg.23]) abroad from come[pres-perf.pl.m.2] , (x[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|whether|x[opt.sg.23]) land from come[pres-perf.pl.m.2] , each one father of loving be[pres.sg.23] .

876Congratulations! 877It is good that you renounce something and create the fortune of many, and so, congratulations!

561सभी बाप का श्रृंगार हो . sabhī bāp kā śhrr̥iṅgār hō . sab[adv.hī] bāp[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] śhrr̥iṅgārnā[root]|śhrr̥iṅgār[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] . all father of (decorate[root]|decoration) (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) .

878All departments are essential and they are number one.

562बिना आपके बाप कुछ नहीं कर सकता . binā āpkē bāp kuchh nahī̃ kar saktā . binā āp[pn.pl.kē] bāp[n.m.;sg.,d.] kuchh nahī̃[neg] karnā[root] saknā[pres-part.m.sg.d.] . without you[.kē] father anything not do[root] can[pres-part.m.sg.d.] .

879All those who cut the vegetables are also essential.

563इसलिये बापदादा भी कहते हैं पहले बच्चे . isliyē bāpdādā bhī kahtē haĩ pahlē bachchē . isliē bāpdādā bhī[p.] kahnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] pahlā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|pahlē[adv.] bachchā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] . therefore BapDada too say[pres.pl.m.12hon3] (x|firstly) child .

880If the vegetables are not cut, they cannot be cooked; if they cannot be cooked, you cannot eat them.

564तो हरेक समझता है कि मैं प्यारा हूँ  ? tō harēk samajhtā hai ki maĩ pyārā hū̃  ? tō har ēk samajhnā[pres.sg.m.23] ki[conj.] maĩ[pn.sg.d.] pyārā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.1]  ? then each one understand[pres.sg.m.23] that I loving be[pres.sg.1]  ?

881Those who clean the grains are picking up diamonds. 882All are very essential.

565एक ही बेहद का बाप सबको प्यार दे सकता है . ēk hī bēhad kā bāp sabkō pyār dē saktā hai . ēk[adj.] hī[p.] bēhad kā bāp[x] sabkō pyār[n.m.;sg.,d.] dēnā[pres.sg.m.23.root+saknā] . one only unlimited Father everything love give[pres.sg.m.23.root+saknā] .

883Whatever each of you is doing, do it as a bestower of happiness.

566आत्मायें नहीं दे सकती , बाप दे सकता है . ātmāyē̃ nahī̃ dē saktī , bāp dē saktā hai . ātmā[n.f.+ē̃;pl.d.] nahī̃[neg] dēnā[root]|dēnā[opt.sg.23] saknā[pres-part.f.] , bāp[n.m.;sg.,d.] dēnā[pres.sg.m.23.root+saknā] . soul not (give[root]|give[opt.sg.23]) can[pres-part.f.] , father give[pres.sg.m.23.root+saknā] .

884You have to give happiness to everyone. 885It is not work that you are doing.

567क्योंकि बेहद है . kyōṅki bēhad hai . kyōṅki bēhad[adj.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] . because unlimited be[pres.sg.23] .

886To do work means to give happiness.

568तो हर एक समझता है मैं बाप का प्यारा हूँ . tō har ēk samajhtā hai maĩ bāp kā pyārā hū̃ . tō har ēk[x] samajhnā[pres.sg.m.23] maĩ[pn.sg.d.] bāp[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] pyārā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.1] . then each one understand[pres.sg.m.23] I father of loving be[pres.sg.1] .

887People of the world work whereas you give happiness.

569नाम लेवें , नहीं लेवें लेकिन प्यारे सब हैं . nām lēvē̃ , nahī̃ lēvē̃ lēkin pyārē sab haĩ . nām[n.m.;sg.,d.] lēnā[opt.pl.12hon3] , nahī̃[neg] lēnā[opt.pl.12hon3] lēkin pyārā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] sab[adj.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] . name take[opt.pl.12hon3] , not take[opt.pl.12hon3] but loving all be[pres.pl.12hon3] .

888So, you gave happiness and claimed blessings. 889It is such good work.

570अच्छा  ! achchhā  ! achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.]  ! achcha  !

890Achcha. 891* * * O MS H A N T I * * *

Abbreviations used